Tải bản đầy đủ (.docx) (356 trang)

giao an Anh Van CKTKN

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (857.52 KB, 356 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span>Ngày soạn: 13 tháng 8 năm 2011. Ngày dạy: 15 tháng 8 năm 2011. Tổng số: ……… Vắng :………………… Tuần 1 Tiết 1 GIỚI THIỆU CHƯƠNG TRÌNH MÔN TIẾNG ANH LỚP 6 I-MỤC TIÊU Giúp học sinh hiểu được chương trình tiếng anh lớp 6 học cái gì, bao gồm những gì, nội dung chính như thế nào, phương pháp học tập ra làm sao. Qua đó giúp các em bước đầu làm quen với môn học mới này.Các em cũng thêm hứng thú để học tập tốt hơn. II-CHUẨN BỊ Thầy: Sách giáo khoa, bài tập , tranh ảnh về học tập tiếng Anh ở một số nơi. Trò: Sách giáo khoa, sách bài tập môn tiếng Anh lớp 6. III-TIẾN TRÌNH GIẢNG DẠY HOẠT ĐỘNG CỦA THẦY, TRÒ NỘI DUNG 1-GIỚI THIỆU SÁCH GIÁO KHOA MÔN TIẾNG ANH LỚP 6 Giúp học sinh biết được cấu trúc của sách Giới thiệu sách giáo khoa. giáo khoa môn tiếng Anh lớp 6. Sách giáo khoa môn tiếng Anh lớp 6 bao Cho học sinh xem toàn bộ sách giáo khao gồm 16 bài, mỗi bài với một chủ đề khác sau đó xem một bài cụ thể ( bài 2 ) nhau. Ví dụ: Bài 1 học về cách chào hỏi, giới thiệu về bản thân. Trong mỗi bài học lại chia thành các phần khác nhau. Ví dụ: Bài 1 phần A, B học cách chào hỏi, giới thiệu về bản thân mình. Phần C học cách nói tuổi. Phần cuối của sách ( từ trang 190 trở đi ) có bảng in các từ viết tắt, tên, phiên âm của một số danh từ riêng chỉ tên người và tên một số quốc gia trên thế giới.Phần này cũng có bảng viết từ và nghĩa của từ đựơc học trong chương trình tiếng Anh lớp 6. Ta có thể tra và hiểu nghĩa những từ chưa biết. Ví dụ: Tìm nghĩa của từ AFTERNOON Từ này có trong bài 1, tìm ở phần đóng khung có ghi Unit 1 trang 191 ta thấy từ này có nghĩa là buổi chiều. 2-GIỚI THIỆU SÁCH BÀI TẬP Giúp học sinh biết được cấu trúc của sách Giới thiệu sách bài tập. bài tập môn tiếng Anh lớp 6. Sách bài tập cũng được thiết kế tương tự như Cho học sinh xem sách bài tập. sách giáo khoa. Tương đương với các phần A, B, C trong sách giáo khoa, sách bài tập cũng được thiết kế theo để các em tự thực hành ở nhà. 3-GIỚI THIỆU MỘT SỐ CÁCH HỌC TẬP CHO HỌC SINH THAM KHẢO Giúp học sinh tham khảo một số cách học Giới thiệu một số cách học tập môn tiếng tập tiêng Anh. Anh. Là môn học nghiên kứu về ngôn ngữ của một dân tộc có nền kinh tế, khoa học kĩ Page 1.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span> 4-BÀI TẬP VỀ NHÀ Xem trước Unit 1 phần A . Chuẩn bị giấy khổ lớn để làm bài tập theo nhóm vào giờ học sau.. thuật, văn hóa phát triển nhất trên thế giới nên để học tập được thuận lợi các em nên tự tìm hiểu những đặc điểm văn hóa của dân tộc đó qua các phương tiện truyền thông. Học ngoại ngữ thì phải nghe và nói được ngoại ngữ đó vì thế các em nên luyện tập nghe-nói cùng bạn bè, thầy cô ở trên lớp. Nếu có điều kiện hơn nữa nên tham gia các buổi hoc ngoại ngữ trên TV, làm đầy đủ các bài tập mà thầy cô giao. ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… ………………………………………………. Page 2 Planning date:August 14. th. 2011..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span> Teaching date:August 16th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………….. UNIT 1 GREETINGS Week 1 Period 2 HELLO ( A1 A2 A3 A4 ) I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to greet each other and introduce themselves. Vocabulary Hi / Hello, my, name, am, is Structure I’m Mai / My name is Mai. II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette for activity 3, pictures for activities 1,3. Students: Big papers to write their introductions III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To lead students into new lesson. Speaking What do you do ? or what do you say when We greet each other. you meet your friends after summer Hello, hi………. vacation? We greet each other. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning of new words and how to introduce their names. Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words Hi ( n ) = hello Hi ( n ) = hello My ( adj )-của tôi My ( adj ) Name ( n )- tên Name ( n ) I ( pro ) -tôi I ( pro ) Stucture and dialogue 2-Structures and dialogue I am…………….tôi là I am…… Ex: I am Mai Ex: I am Mai My name is………..tên của tôi là My name is……….. Ex:My name is Mai Ex:My name is Mai Notice: I am = I’m Notice: I am = I’m My name is = My name’s. My name is = My name’s. Dialogue build Lan: Hi. I’m Lan. Or Hi. My name is Lan Hi. I am Tuan. Nga: Hello.I’m Nga.Or Hello.My name is Hello. My name is Lan Nga Hello. I’m Mai. Hello. I’m An. Hi. My name is Ngoc. Hi. My name is Lien. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practice how to introduce their name. Ask students to greet each other and Practise listening and speaking introduce themselves.( A2-A3 ) A-Hello. I’m A. B-Hi. My name is B. C-Hi. My name is C. D-Hi. My name is D 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) Page 3 -To help students practise introducing their.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span> names by themselves. Ask students to work in groups, speak and then write sentences to introduce their name. ( A4 ). 5-HOME WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise. Exercise 1 on page 4 - workbook. Exercise 2 on page 4-5. Writing Mai: Hello. I am Mai. Lan: Hi. My name is Lan. ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… Exercise 1: Look at pictures and use I am .… to write sentence. Ex: Picture a : I’m Mai Exercise 2: Look at pictures and use My name is …to write sentence Ex: Hi. My name is Nga.. Page 4 th. Planning date:August 15 2011. Teaching date:August 17th 2011.. Total: ……….. Absentees: …………………..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span> UNIT 1 GREETINGS Week 1 Period 3 HELLO ( A5 A6 A7 ) I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to greet each other. Vocabulary How, you, are, And you? Fine, thanks, Miss, Mr Structure How are you? I am fine, thanks. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette and picture for activities 5, 6, cassette for activity 5 Students: big paper to write greetings for activity 7 III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson. Speaking How do you greet when you meet your friends? Hello, Hi How do you introduce your name? I am A…….My name is A 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning of new words and form to ask how people are Pre-teach 1-New words Fine ( adj)-khỏe mạnh Fine ( adj ) Thank ( v )- cảm ơn Thank ( v ) Mr ( n )-ông Mr ( n ) Miss ( n )-bà, cô Miss ( n ) How ( adv )-thế nào How ( adv ) You ( pro )-bạn, các bạn You ( pro ) Are ( v )-là Are ( v ) And you?- còn cậu thì sao? And you? Model sentences 2-Structure How are you? How are you? I am fine,thanks. I am fine,thanks. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise asking how people are Practise speaking and writing Ask students to practise. ( A6, A7 ) Miss.Hoa: Hello, Mr.Hung. Mr.Hung: Hi, Miss.Hoa Miss.Hoa: How are you? Mr.Hung: I’m fine,thanks. And you? Miss.Hoa: Fine, thanks Nam: Hello, Lan. How are you? Lan: Hi, I am fine. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise by themselves. Speak these Vietnamese sentences in Practise speaking English. -Chào bạn Lan. Hôm nay ban có khỏe không? -Mình khỏe, cảm ơn bạn. Thế còn bạn thì sao? Page 5 -Tôi khỏe Hi, Lan. How are you today?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span> I am fine. Thanks. And you? I’m fine, too. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 3-4 on page 5 in work book. Exercise 3-4: Look at the pictures and complete the dialogue. Ex: Nam: Hello. My ….. …….Nam. Hello. My name is Nam. Ex: Nam: Hello. My ….. …….Nam. Hello. My name is Nam. Page 6 Planning date:August 20th 2011. Teaching date:August 22nd 2011. Total: ……….. Absentees: ………………….. UNIT 1 GREETINGS.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span> Week 2 Period 4 GOOD MORNING ( B1-B4 ) I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to greet each other. Vocabulary Good morning / afternoon / evening / night / good bye Structure How are you to day? We are fine. II-PREPARATION Teacher:picture for activity 1-2, cassette for activity1-3 Students: big papers for activity 4. III-PROCEDURE. TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Ask students: How do you say when you want to introduce your name? 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to use greetings. Pre-teach Good morning ( n ) Good afternoon ( n ) Good evening ( n ) Good night ( n ) Good bye ( n ) Children ( n ) We ( pro )-chúng tôi, chúng ta, chúng em We are …… chúng tôi là ……. We are children / students Notice : we are = we’re How are you? We are fine ,thanks. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise greeting people Picture drill ( B1, B2 ) Ask students to look at all pictures on page 14. Listen to the tape while speaking. Ask students to look at the four pictures on page 15 and practise with a parter. Ask students to look at activity B3 on page 15. Listen to the tape while reading Ask students to practise in groups of two.. CONTENT. Speaking I am A. My name is A.. 1-New words Good morning ( n ) Good afternoon ( n ) Good evening ( n ) Good night ( n ) Good bye ( n ) Children ( n ) We ( pro ) 2-Structure We are ……. We are children / students. We are = we’re How are you? We are fine, thanks. 1-Practise speaking Picture a: Good morning b: Good afternoon c: Good evening ………………………………………….. S1: Good morning S3: Good afternoon S2: Good morning S4: Good afternoon …………………. …………………… 2-Practise reading Students listen and read ( B3 ). …………………………………………... Students practise ( B3 ). 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) Page 7 -To let students practise by themselves and check their understanding Ask students to read the dialogue B3 again. 1-Practise reading.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span> and then complete B4.. Students read dialogue ( B 3 ) 2-Practise writing Students work in groups and the write B4. Lan: Good afternoon, Nga. Nga: Good afternoon, Lan Lan: How are you? Nga: I am fine, thanks. And you? Lan: Fine,thanks Nga: Good bye. Lan: Bye.. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1-2-3 on page 6,7 workbook. Exercise 1: Match the words in the box with the picture. Exercise 2: Write the dialogues in the correct order. Exercise 3: Complete the dialogue. Ex: Picture a- Good morning …………………………………………........ ……………………………………………… Ex:…… …….Miss Hoa. Good morning Miss Hoa.. Page 8 st. Planning date: August 21 2012. Teaching date: August 22rd 2012. Total: ……….. Absentees: ……………….. UNIT 1 GREETINGS.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span> Week 2 Period 5 HOW OLD ARE YOU? ( C1-C2 ) I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to count to twenty. Vocabulary One, two, three, four Structure One and two is three / three minus two is one. II-PREPARATION Teacher: cards ( write the number in letter on ) Students:cards ( write the number on ). III-PROCEDURE. TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Ask two students to stand up. One reads numbers and the other comes to the board and writes the numbers which he or she hears. 2-PRESENTATION ( 20 minutes ) -To give students how to read numbers Pre-teach Oh ( adj, n )- 0 One ( adj, n )-1 Two ( adj, n )- 2 Three ( adj, n )-3 Four ( adj, n )-4 Five ( adj, n )-5 Six ( adj, n )- 6 Seven ( adj, n )-7 Eight ( adj, n )-8 Nine (adj, n )-9 Ten ( adj, n )-10 Eleven ( adj, n )-11 Twelve ( adj, n )-12 Thirteen (adj, n )-13 Fourteen ( adj, n )-14 Fifteen ( adj, n )-15 Sixteen ( adj, n )-16 Seventeen ( adj, n )-17 Eighteen ( adj, n )-18 Nineteen ( adj, n )-19 Twenty ( adj, n )-20 And ( conj )-cộng Minus / mns / ( pre )-trừ One and two is three. Three minus two is one. 3-PRACTICE ( 8 minutes ) -To help students practise counting. Ask students to look activity C1. Listen to the tape while reading. Ask students to practise in groups of two.. CONTENT Speaking and writing One, two, three, four, five ……………........ …………………………………………........ Vocabulary Oh ( adj, n ) One ( adj, n ) Two ( adj, n ) Three ( adj, n ) Four ( adj, n ) Five ( adj, n ) Six ( adj, n ) Seven ( adj, n ) Eight ( adj, n ) Nine (adj, n ) Ten ( adj, n ) Eleven ( adj, n ) Twelve ( adj, n ) Thirteen (adj, n ) Fourteen ( adj, n ) Fifteen ( adj, n ) Sixteen ( adj, n ) Seventeen ( adj, n ) Eighteen ( adj, n ) Nineteen ( adj, n ) Twenty ( adj, n ) And ( conj ) Minus ( pre ) One and two is three. Three minus two is one. Practise counting from oh to twenty Page 9 Students listen and count. ( C1 ) …………………………………………........ ………………………………………….........

<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span> Practise counting from oh to twenty C2. Ex: Student A says: one B says: two …………… 4-PRODUCTION ( 7 minutes ) -To help students practise by themselves Dictation: Teacher reads the numbers, students write on their papers. Teacher tells students to listen and write down these TELEPHONE NUMBERS 8200294, 9504423, 510518, 8565656,7683045 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1 on page 7. Write the words under the numbers.. Students practise in groups. ( C2 ) ……………………………………………… ………………………………………………. Writing One, two, three, four, five, six, seven…........ …………………………………………....... Eight two oh oh two nine four ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………... Ex: 2—two, 20—twenty ………………. Page 10 nd. Planning date:August 22 2012. Teaching date:August 23rd 2012. Total ……….. Absentees: ………………… UNIT 1 GREETINGS.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span> Week 2 Period 6 HOW OLD ARE YOU? ( C3-C5 ) I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their age and practice in numbers 1-20. Vocabulary This is, how old, years old Structure This is Lan. How old are you ? I am twelve years old. II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette for activity 3, picture for activity 3 Students:draw nine squares on a piece of paper for activity 5 III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students to give two ways to introduce My name is …… their name. I am …………... My name is Tuan. I am Lan. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students how to introduce someone and how to ask and answer about someone’s age Pre-teach Grammar structure This is-đây là ( dùng để giới thiệu một ai This is……. đó ) How old-bao nhiêu tuổi ( dùng để hỏi tuổi How old ….. một ai đó ) Years old ( n-ph )- tuổi Years old ( n-ph ) Model sentences This is Lan. This is Lan. How old are you? How old are you? I am twelve years old. I am twelve years old. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise asking and answering about their age Ask students to look at C3 on page 18. 1-Practise listening and redaing Listen to the tape while reading ( C3 ). Students read ( C3 ). Ask students to use the numbers they learnt 2-Practise talking about the age to answer the question How old are you? Students practise. ( C4 ) T: How old are you? S1: I am ten years old. T: How old are you ? S2: I am twenty years old. ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………... 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise by themselves Ask each student to introduce her or Practise speaking and writing Page 11 himself. ( speak and then write ) Ex: Hello. Students introduce themselves before class. My name is Lan . I am twelve …………………………………………........ years old. ………………………………………….........

<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span> …………………………………………........ 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 2-3-4 on page 8-9workbook. Exercise 2:Write the sentences with This is ……. Exercise 3: Complete the dialogue. Ex: How… … You? … …Ten …. … And… … … you? Exercise 4: Complete the dialogue.. Ex: This is Mai / This is Nga. Ex: How old are you? I am ten years old. And how old are you? …………………………………………... Page 12 th. Planning date:August 27 2011. Teaching date:August 29th 2011. Total:……….. Absentees: ………………………. UNIT 2 AT SCHOOL.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span> Week 3 Period 7 COME IN ( A1-A3 ) I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able understand classroom imperatives and they can do follow the teacher’s commands. Vocabulary come in, sit down, open your books……….. Structure imperatives: come in !, sit down ! II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette for activity 1 Students: big papers to write teacher’s commands for activity 3. III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Ask students to speak something about themselves. Name, age ……. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning of new words and how to pronounce Pre-teach To come in ( v )-đi vào To sit down ( v )-ngồi xuống To open ( v )-mở ( open your book ) To close ( v )-đóng ( close your book ) To stand up ( v )-đứng lên To go out ( v )-ra ngoài Ask students to listen to the tape while pronouncing. ( activity 1 ) 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise classroom imperatives Matching Ask students to look at all pictures on page 21 and match. ( A 2 ). Simon say. Let students play a game “ Simon says “ Teacher says students act Ex : sit down students sit down 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise by themselves Ask students to complete the dialogue. A- ………. Morning. B-Good …………... Miss.Hoa. A-How ……………. ?. CONTENT. Speaking Good morning. My name is Lan. I am eleven years old. 1-New words To come in ( v ) To sit down ( v ) To open ( v ) ( open your book ) To close ( v ) close your book ) To stand up ( v ) To go out ( v ) 2-Practise listening and reading Students pronounce new words.. 1-Matching Picture a…………Open your book Picture b…………Sit down Picture c…………Come in Picture d…………Close your book Picture e…………Stand up 2-Practise listening and speaking Students practise ( A 2 ) ………………………………………….. ………………………………………….. ………………………………………….. Practise writing A-Good Morning. B-Good morning Miss. Hoa. A-How are you ? Page 13. B-We are fine. …………………..? A-Fine thanks. ………. down. B-Yes, Miss.Hoa. B-We are fine. How are you ? A-Fine thanks. Sit down. B-Yes, Miss.Hoa.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span> A-Open ……………. B-Yes, Miss.Hoa 5-HOME WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1-2 on page 11-12 workbook. Exercise 1: Matching. Exercise 2: Look at the pictures and write the sentences. A-Open your book B-Yes, Miss.Hoa.. Example: Come -------. Example: Picture a - Come in.. Page 14 th. Planning date:August 28 2011. Teaching date:August 30th 2011. Total:………..Absentees:……………………….. UNIT 2 AT SCHOOL.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span> Week 3 Period 8 WHERE DO YOU LIVE ? ( B1-B2 ) I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about the places they live. Vocabulary you - your, I – my, where, live, do Structure What is your name? My name is Nga. Where do you live? I live at twelve Tran Phu street. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette, picture for activity 1 Students: big papers to write sentences in groups. III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Ask students. Speaking When you want to know someone’s name What is your name? How old are you? and somenoe’s age how do you ask? My name is ………. I am ….. years old. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning of new words and the form to ask and answer about the places we live Pre-teach 1-New words ( to ) live ( v )-sống ( to ) live ( v ) ( in ) a house- trong một ngôi nhà ( in ) a house ( on ) a street-trên đường phố ( on ) a street ( in ) a city-trong thành phố ( in ) a city Presentation Dialogue 2-Grammar structure Model sentences Where do you live? Where do you live? I live on Tran Phu street I live on Tran Phu street in a house in a house in a city in a city in Hue in Hue in Viet Nam in Viet Nam 3-Practise listening and reading Ask students to listen to the tape while Students listen and repeat. ( B 1 ) reading ( B1 ) 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise asking and answering with question “Where do you live?” Practise speaking Word Cue Drill S1: Where do you live? A city Ha Noi S2: I live on Le Loi street in HCM city. A house Le Loi street ……………………………………………… Tran Phu street Hung Vuong street ……………………………………………… Ho Chi Minh city ……………………………………………… 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise by themselves themselves ( writing ) Page 15 Survey Practise writing Name What is your name? Street My name is Nga..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span> City / Country. 5-HOME WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 3-4 on page 12-13 work book Exercise 3: Complete the dialogue. Hello. My name’s ……….. What’s ……… name? Exercise 4: Complete the sentences I live ……… Hang Da street. Where …….. you live?. Where do you live? I live on Tran Phu street in Ha Noi. ………………………………………….. ………………………………………….. ………………………………………….. …………………………………………... Ex:Hello. My name’s Lan. What’s your name? Ex: I live on Hang Da street.. Page 16 Planning date:August 29 th 2011. Teaching date:August 31st 2011. Total: ……….. Absentees: ……………………… UNIT 2 AT SCHOOL.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span> Week 3 Period 9 WHERE DO YOU LIVE ? ( B3-B5 ) I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use question “ what’s your name ? and how do you spell it? with the alphabet ” to talk about your name. Vocabulary to spell, a, b, c, d, e …………… Structure What is your name?-My name is ……….. How do you spell it?-L-A-N II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette for activity 3-4 Students: alphabet ( a-z ) III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Ask students. Speaking Where do you live? I live in / on ……… 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students how to pronounce each letter Pre-teach 1- New words A b c d e f g h i j k l m A b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v wx y z n o p q r s t u v wx y z Model sentence 2-Grammar structure What is your name ? What is your name ? My name is Tuan My name is Tuan How do you spell it ? How do you spell it ? T-U-A-N ( ti-ju: ei-en ) T-U-A-N ( ti-ju: ei-en ) Ask students to listen to the tape while 3-Practise listening and reading reading the alphabet ( a-z ). ( B 3 ) Students pronounce. ………………………………………… 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise spelling their name. Word Cue Drill ( B4 ) Practise speaking Ask students to write their own names on cards to make the cues for the drill. Example What is your name? S1: What is your name? ( gives real name ) S2: My name is Thoa. How do you spell it ? S1: How do you spell it? ( gives real spelling ) S2: T-H-O-A ……………………………………………... ……………………………………………... 4-PRORODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) ……………………………………………... -To help students practise by themselves Ask students to write the answer for each Practise writing Page 17 question below. ( B5 ) a-What is your name? ( writing ) …………………………………………....... b-How old are you?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span> …………………………………………....... c-Where do you live? …………………………………………....... d-How do you spell your name? …………………………………………....... 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 5-6 on page 13-work book. Exercise 5: Write the full form. I’m ten years old. Exercise 6: Write the answer. Good morning ……………... I’m ten years old - I am ten years old Good morning. - Good morning. Page 18 Planning date:September 4th 2011. Teaching date:September 6th 2011. Total: ……….. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 2 AT SCHOOL.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span> Week 4 Period 10 MY SCHOOL ( C1 ) I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson,students will be able to talk about people and things at school using this / that positive statements and Yes / No –questions Vocabulary That is…., school, class, desk, classroom Structure This is my school and that is my classroom. Is this your teacher ? Yes .This is my teacher. II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette for activity 1, Yes / No –question on a big paper. Students:draw picture 3 on page 27 III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Jumbled words Speaking veeingn lleho treest yict Evening hello street city ndstapu teethirn Stand up thirteen 2-PRESNTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning of new words and the structure with this / that and yes / no –questions with is. 1-New words Pre-teach A student A student ( n )-học sinh, sinh viên A teacher A teacher ( n )-giáo viên A school A school ( n )-trường A class A class ( n )- lớp A desk A desk ( n )-bàn học sing 2-Matching Matching A student bàn học sinh Ask students to match each word with its A teacher lớp meaning. A school giáo viên A class trường A desk học sinh, sinh viên 3-Speaking Word Cue Drill S1: What is this in EngLish? Show the word ( bàn học sinh ) and ask S2:A school students: S1:How do you spell it? T-What is this in EngLish? S2: S-C-H-O-O-L S-A desk …………………………………………....... T-How do you spell it? …………………………………………....... S-D-E-S-K 4-Grammar structure Model Sentences This is my class. This is my desk. That is my teacher. That is my school. Is this your desk?-Yes, it is. ( Yes, this / that Is this your class? Yes, it is / Yes, it is my class. is my desk ) No, it isn’t / No, this isn’t Is that your school? No, it isn’t. ( No, that my class. isn’t my school ). Page 19 isn’t = is not Is that your teacher ? Yes. That is my teacher Notice: isn’t = is not.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span> 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise new structures they have just learnt. Ask students to listen to the tape while reading ( C 1 - page 26 ) Picture Drill Ask students look at the things teacher shows. Ask and answer ( using yes-no question with is ). 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise by themselves ( writing ) Ask students to make questions with is this / is that and answer with yes or no. Ex: Is this your teacher? Yes. This is my teacher 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 2 on page 15-work book. Write the question. Ex:This is my class. Is this your class.. 1-Practise listening and reading ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… 2-Practise speaking S1: Is this your school? S2: Yes, it is. S3: Is that your class? S4: No, it isn’t. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... Practise writing Is this your shool? Yes, it is. Is that your class? No, it isn’t. Is this your teacher? Yes, this is my teacher. ……………………………………………… ………………………………………………. This is my class. Is this your class. Page 20 th. Planning date:September 5 2011. Teaching date:September 7th 2011. Total: ………. .Absentees: ……………………. UNIT 2 AT SCHOOL Week 4 Period 11 MY SCHOOL ( C2-C3 ) I-OBJECTIVE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span> By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about things in the classroom ( using What is this / that? It is a / an …………) Vocabulary a school bag, a pen, a pencil, a ruler, an eraser, a door………. Structure What is this / that? It is a board / It is an eraser. II-PREPARATION Teacher :cassette for activity 2 Students: draw pictures on page 28-29. III-PROCEDURE. TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Ask students to make questions for these answers. a-This is my bag. b-That is my school. c-That is my teacher. d-That is my desk. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning of new words, how to ask and answer with what is this / that ? Pre-teach vocabulary A door ( n )-cửa ra vào A window ( n )-cửa sổ A board ( n )-cái bảng A clock ( n ) -đồng hồ treo tường A ruler ( n )-thước kẻ A waste basket ( n )-bô rác A pen ( n )-bút máy A pencil ( n )-bút chì An eraser ( n )-cục tẩy Model Sentences What is this? It is a door What is that? It is an eraser. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise by themselves Ask students to look at the pictures-page 28. Listen to the tape and repeat. Teacher shows each thing in each picture on page 28 and ask two students to ask and answer .. CONTENT. Speaking a-Is this your bag? b-Is that your school? c-Is that your teacher? d-Is that your desk?. 1-New words A door A window A board A clock A waste basket. A school A pencil A pencil A ruler An eraser. 2-Grammar structure What is this? It is a pen. What is that? It is a ruler. 1-Practise listening and reading Students read ( C2-page 28 ) ……………………………………………… 2-Practise speaking S1: What is this ? S2: It is a clock. S3: What is that? S4: It is a waste basket. Page 21. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise by themselves ( using this is / that is to introduce things in their class ) Ask students to close their books. Show each Practise speaking and writing.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span> thing in their classroom and introduce . Ex: Show the door and speak : This is a door. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1 on page 14-15, exercise 3 on page 15-16 work book. Exercise 1: What is this in EngLish? 2:Complete the dialogue.. This is a window, this is a desk. That is a pen and this is a pencil. This is a waste basket and that is a school bag. This is a board and that is a clock.. Ex: A ruler, a desk….. Ex: Picture b: What is that? That is a clock.. Page 22 th. Planning date: September 10 2011. Teaching date: September 12th 2011. Total: ……….. Absentees: …………………. UNIT 3 AT HOME Week 5 Period 12 MY HOUSE ( A1-A2 ) I-OBJECTIVE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span> By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about things in the house ( using whquestions with this / that , these / those and living room vocabulary. Vocabulary these, those, they, a lamp, abooksheft, a chair Structure What is this / that? It is a table. What are these / those? They are tables. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette activity 1 Students:draw picture 1 on page 31 for activity 1 III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Show the things in the classroom and ask Show the door. What is this? students. It is a door Pencil:What is that? It is a pencil. ……………………………… ……………………………… 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning of new words, how to ask and answer with what are these / those? Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words A lamp ( n )-đèn bàn A lamp ( n ) A bookshelf ( n )-giá sách A bookshelf ( n ) A chair ( n )-cái ghế A chair ( n ) A couch ( n )-đi văng A couch ( n ) An armchair ( n )-ghế có tay vịn An armchair ( n ) A table ( n )-cái bàn A table ( n ) A television ( n )-T V A television ( n ) A stereo ( n )-cái đài A stereo ( n ) These ( pron )-những người, vật này These ( pron ) Those ( pron )-những người, vật kia Those ( pron ) They ( pron )-họ, chúng nó They ( pron ) Model Sentences. 2-Grammar structure What is this / that? It is a / an + singular noun What is this / that? It is a / an + singular noun What is this? It is a couch. What is this? It is a couch. It is an eraser. ( an used before noun with a vowel a, e, i, o, ( an used before noun with a vowel a, e, i, o, u or noun beginning with a mute h ) u or noun beginning with a mute h ) Ex: a table, a pen but an eraser because e Ex: a table, a pen but an eraser because e beginning . beginning . What are these / those? What are these / those? They are + plural They are + plural noun. noun. What are those? They are lamps. What are those? They are lamps. Page 23 ( Plural noun = singular noun + s / es. ( Plural noun = singular noun + s / es. Nouns ending in o, ch, sh, ss, x form their Ex: A pen two pens plural by adding es ) A box ten boxes 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise reading new.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span> words, ask and answer with what is tis / that? What are these / those ? Ask students to look at the pictures on pages 1-Practise listening ans speaking 30-31. Listen to the tape while reading. Students read ( A1-page 30-31 ) ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… Ask them to look at the pictures. Answer 2-Practise speaking questions. a-What is this? ( a telephone ) It is a telephone. b-What are these ? ( two chairs ) They are chairs. c-What is that? ( a table ) It is a table. d-What are those ? ( three couches ) They are couches. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise by themselves ( writing ) Practise writing Draw a table, two TVs, ten chairs…… on A table: What is this? It is a table. the board and ask students to make question Two TVs:What are these? They are TVs. and answer, then write down. Ten chairs: What are those? They are chairs. ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1,2 on page 17-18 work book. Exercise1: Put this / these, that / those and Ex: Picture b This-lamp. name of the object. Exercise 2: Complete the sentences. Ex:What is this? It is a lamp.. Page 24 th. Planning date:September 11 2011. Teaching date:September 13th 2011. Total: ……….. Absentees: …………………….. UNIT 3 AT HOME Week 5 Period 13 MY HOUSE ( A3-A4 ) I-OBJECTIVE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span> By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about family members ( using family vocabulary, possessive pronouns my, your, his and who is this / that ?-question. Vocabulary she – her, he-his, how many ………. Structure Who is this / that ? This / that is my mother. What’s her name? Her name is Nga / How old is she ? she is ……. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette for activity 3 Students:big papers to do exercise in groups. III-PROCEDURE. Page 25 Her name is Nga. How old is Lan ? She is fifteen years old. How many people are there in your family? There are four..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span> 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise asking answering about someone’s name and age Ask students to listen to the tape while reading the text Ask them to read again and then answer questions .. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise by themselves ( ask and answer about yourself ). 5-HOME WORK At home do exercise 3, 4 on page 19-20 work book. Exercise 3: Complete the dialogue. Exercise 4: Write the sentences. 1-Practise listening and reading ( A3 ) ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… 2-Question and answer ( A 4 ) a-What is her name? Her name is Nga. b-What is his name? His name is Ha. c-Who is this ? How old is he? This is Ba. He is 12 years old. d-Who is this? How old is she? This is Lan. She is 15 years old. e-How many people are there in the family? There are four. a-What is your name? …………………………………………….. b-How old are you? …………………………………………….. c-How many people are there in your family? …………………………………………….... Ex: How many people are there? There are five people. Ex: Name: Ba, age :11 What is his name ? His name is Ba. How old is he? He is eleven years old.. Page 26 th. Planning date:September 12 2011. Teaching date:September 14th 2011. Total: ……….. Absentees: ………………….. UNIT 3 AT HOME Week 5 Period 14 NUMBERS ( B1-B2 ) I-OBJECTIVE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span> By the end of the lesson,students will be able to count from 21 to 100 and understand pronunciation of plural nouns ( / s /, / z / and / iz / ). Vocabulary chair, desk, bench, stool Structure There is a / one door in the classroom. There are twenty desks in the classroom. II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette for activity 1 Students: write number 20, 30, 40……on a big paper. III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask student to come to the board and write One, two, three, four ……………………. numbers from 1 to 20. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students how to count in English the numbers from twenty to one hundred and the structure there is …… / there are …... Pre-teach 1-New words Thirty ( n )-30 Thirty ( n ) Forty ( n )-40 Forty ( n ) Fifty ( n )-50 Fifty ( n ) Sixty ( n )-60 Sixty ( n ) Seventy ( n )-70 Seventy ( n ) Eighty ( n )- 80 Eighty ( n ) Ninety ( n )-90 Ninety ( n ) One hundred ( n )-100 One hundred ( n ) One hundred and one ( n )- 101 One hundred and one ( n ) One hundred and twenty two ( n )-122 One hundred and twenty two ( n ) 2-Grammar structure There is a / an + singular noun ( có môt ..) There is a desk in the classroom. There are + plural noun ( có nhiều…….) There are two books on the table. ( Plural noun = singular noun + s / es ) ( Plural noun = singular noun + s / es ) Nouns ending in o, ch, sh, ss, x form their Nouns ending in o,ch, sh, ss, x form their plural by adding es ) plural by adding es ) Exampla Singular noun plural noun a desk desks a pen pens a student students a door doors a couch couches There is a desk. There are ten desks. There is a pen. There are pens. There is a couch. There are two couches. Page 27 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise counting from twenty to one hundred, making sentences with there is …/ there are…….. Ask students to listen to the tape while 1-Listen and count ( B1 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span> reading number from 20 to 100. Ask them to look at the picture on page 36 . Use words given to make sentences with there is ……… / there are ………….. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students distinguish / s /, / iz / , /z/ Dictation lists Teacher reads: desks, rulers, benches, students, tables, books, clocks, couches, doors, windows, houses, lamps 5-HOME WORK At home do exercise 1, 2 on page 21 work book. Exercise 1 : Write the answers in words. 2 : Write the plurals of the words.. Students listen and count. ……………………………………………... ……………………………………………... 2-Practise speaking -There is a window. -There is a door. -There is a clock. -There are five tables. -There are four benches. -There are two students. …………………………………………... ………………………………………….... Dictation Students write /s/ /z/ desks rulers students tables. / iz / benches couches. 10 + 5 = fifteen Window windows. Page 28 th. Planning date:September 17 2011. Teaching date:September 19th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: ……………………….. UNIT 3 AT HOME Week 6 Period 15 NUMBERS ( B3-B5 ) I-OBJECTIVE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span> How many ………. are there? questions and further practice in numbers to talk about things in the classroom, the living room and the family. Vocabulary review words for things in the living room Structure How many doors are there? There is a door / There are two doors. II-PREPARATION Teacher: picture for activity 5 Students: big paper to do exercise in groups III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students to use there is ….. / there are There is a door in the classroom. …….. to describe their classroom. There are four windows in the room. There are ten tables in my classroom. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) There is a board in the classroom. -To give students question how many…… are there? and answer with there is… / there are……., pronunciation of plural nouns ( / s /, / z / and / iz / ). ( plural noun = singular noun + s / es ) 1-How to pronounce / s /, / z / or / iz / -s is pronounced / s / after a f, ph / f /, k / k / A book ----- books, a lamp ------ lamps p / p /, t / t /, th /  /. -s is pronounced / z / after a b / b /, d / d /, g A friend ----- friends, a pen --- pens, a song ----- songs / g /, l / l /, m / m /, n / n / ng /  /, or vowel a chair ---- chairs, a door --- doors, an eye --+ r / r / and vowel sounds eyes. An orange --- oranges, a nose ----- noses -s is pronounced / iz / after a ge /  /, se, ze / z / A couch ---- couches, a box --- boxes -es is pronounced / iz / after a ch /  /, sh A boss --- bosses /  /, ss / s /, x / ks / 2-Grammar structure How many doors are there? How many + plural noun + are there? There is a door. There is + singular noun. How many windows are there? There are + plural noun. There are fours windows 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise wh-question how many……are there? and answer with there is……./ there are……… Practise speaking Ask students to look at the picture on page S1: How many armchairs are there? 37. Ask and answer each other. S2: There are two armchairs. S3:How many couches are there? S4: There is a couch. Page 29 S5:How many people are there? S6:There are four people. S7: How many lamps are there? S8: There is a lamp. S9: How many chairs are there? S10:.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span> S10:There are two chairs. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise by themselves ( use how many…. are there and answer with there is… / there are…….) Ask students to ask and answer about their houses, their family. Ex: How many people are there in your family? There are 5. How many tables are there in your house? There is one. 5-HOME WORK At home do exercise 3, 4 onpage 22 work book. Exercise 3: Complete the sentences. 4: Write the dialogue.. Practise speaking and writing -How many clocks are there in your house? -There is one. -How many lamps are there in your house? -There are three. …………………………………………....... …………………………………………....... Ex: How many tables are there? There are twenty-five tables. Ex: How many windows are there? There are two windows.. Page 30 th. Planning date:September 18 2011. Teaching date:September 20th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 3 AT HOME Week 6 Period 16 FAMILIES ( C1-C2 ) I-OBJECTIVE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span> Reading a text about a family to understand the details and talk about jobs. Vocabulary he, she , we , our Structure What does he / she do? He / she is a doctor / a nurse. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette and picture for activity 1 Students:picture for activity 2 III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To lead students into new lesson Speaking Ask students. How many people are there in your family? There are………..in my family. 2-PRE-READING ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning of new words, hoe to ask and answer about the job and predict the main content of the text. Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words Our ( adj )-của chúng tôi Our ( adj ) Your ( adj )-của các bạn Your ( adj ) Their ( adj )-của họ Their ( adj ) He ( pro )- anh ta, anh ấy, ông ta He ( pro ) She ( pro )-cô ta, chị ấy, bà ta She ( pro ) An engineer ( n )-kĩ sư An engineer ( n ) A doctor ( n )-bác sĩ A doctor ( n ) A nurse ( n )-y tá A nurse ( n ) Model sentence 2-Grammar structure What do you do? I am a teacher / a student. What does he do ? He is a teacher. What does he / she do? He / she is a doctor. What does she do ? She is an engineer. a nurse. Open prediction 3-Prediction Lan’s family How What does old……? he / she do? Father Mother Brother Lan 3-WHILE-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise reading and answering questions about Lan’s family. Ask students to listen to the tape while reading the text and then check their prediction. Ask them to read the text again and then answer questions.. 1-Practise listening and reading ( C1 ) ……………………………………………… 2-Check prediction ……………………………………………… Page 31 3-Questions and answer a-How many people are there in her family? There are four people in her family. b-How old is her father? He is forty years old..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span> c-What does he do? He is an engineer. d-How old is her mother? She is thirty-five years old. e-What does she do ? She is a teacher. f-How old is her brother? He is eight years old. g-What does he do? He is a student. h-Where are they? They are in their living room. 4-POST-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise speaking about Song’s family. Ask students to look at the pictures on page 39.Use the information given to talk about Song’s family.. 5-HOME WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 5 on page 26 work book. Read .Then write the answer.. Practise speaking ( C2 ) Mr.Kien / doctor / 42 years old What is his name? His name is Kien. What does he do? He is a doctor. How old is he? He is 42 years old. -This is Mr.Kien He is Song’s father. He is forty-two years old. He is a doctor. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... Page 32 th. Planning date:September 19 2011. Teaching date:September 21st 2011. Total: ........... Absentees:……………………. Week 6 Period 17 GRAMMAR PRACTICE I-OBJECTIVE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span> Further practice in “ BE “, imperatives, numbers, question words, there is / there are and furniture vocabulary. Vocabulary words for furnitures ( review ) Structure S + am /is / are + complement S + ( am / is / are ) + not + complement. Is / are + S + complement? II-PREPARATION Teacher:form of “ to be “ on a big paper, picture, table for exercise 10 Students:write all exercises in their notebooks. III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students to do language focus 7, 8 on Language focus 7: Write the words for the page 42. numbers 1 5 8 10 20 30 50 One, five, eight, ten, twenty, thirty, fifty, 70 90 100 seventy, ninety, one hundred Write the numbers for the words Four, seven, nine, eleven, fifteen, twenty-five 4 7 9 11 15 25 sixty, seventy-five, eighty 60 75 80 Language focus 8: Greeting Thanh: Hello Chi: I’m fine, thank Chi: Hello you. How are you? Thanh: How are you? Thanh: Fine.Thank. 2-PRESENTATION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students remember how to use S + be + complement, wh-question and how many ……………….?. 3-PRACTICE ( 15 minutes). Grammar structure 1-BE Affirmative S + am / is / are + complement Negative S + ( am / is / are ) + not + complement. Interrogative Is / are + S + complement? Yes, + S + am / is / are. No, + S + am not / isn’t / aren’t. ( I am …… / she, he, it, my sister, Lan + is ... We, you, they, my sisters, Mai and Lan + are 2-HOW MANY How many + plural noun + are there? There is + singular noun. There are + plural noun. Page 33 ( plural noun = singular noun + s / es ) 3-WH-QUESTION What, where, when, why, which and how..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span> -To help students practise these structures.. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise structure S + be + complement by themselves.. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home study all knowledge you learnt in unit 1, 2, 3. Next period I am going to give you a test.. Practise speaking Language focus 1 I am Nga. I am a student. My mother and father are teachers. My brother is a student. There are four people in my family. Language focus 2 I am Ba. This is Nga. She is my friend. We are in the yard. My mother and father are in the house. Language focus 5 How many desks are there? There is a desk. How many books are there? There are three books. How many students are there? There are two students. How many teacher are there? There is a teacher. Language focus 6 What is your name? My name is Nam. Where do you live ? I live in Ha Noi. Who is that? That is my brother. What does he do ? He is a student. Practise writing Language focus 3 How old are you? I am twelve. How old is she? She is eleven. Is he eleven? No, he isn’t. Are they twelve? No, they aren’t. Language focus 4 Come in sit down open your book Close your book stand up Language focus 9 Ba: What is that? Is it a desk? Thu: Yes, it is. Ba: What is this? Is it a desk? Thu: No, it isn’t. It is a table. …………………………………………… …………………………………………… ……………………………………………. Page 34 Planning date:September 24th 2011. Testing date: September 26th 2011. Total: ........... Absentees: ……………………… Week 7 Period 18 WRITTEN TEST 1 I-OBJECTIVE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span> Themes / topics: Personal information ( oneself, friends, house and family ) Language focus: Vocabulary ( name of house hold objects, words describing family members, names of occupations) Grammar structures: Present simple of to be, wh-questions, this / that, these / those, in, on, at, there is …………. / there are ………….. II-PREPARATION Teacher: Photocopy paper tests Students:Revise from unit 1 to unit 3 : Vocabulary ( name of house hold objects, words describing family members, names of occupations) Grammar structures: Present simple of to be, wh-questions, this / that, these / those , in, on, at, there is ……… there are ……… III-FORM OF THE TEST Tên / Chủ đề Personal information one self, friends, family and school I-Listening -Listen for specific information -Phonetic 25 % II-Reading -Question and answer 25 % III-Language focus -Choose the best answer 25 % IV-Writing -Use there is / are and the words or phrases given to write the full sentences 25 % Tổng số: 100 %. Nội dung cần kiểm tra. Nhận biết. Family. Số câu: 4 Số điểm: 2. /s/,/z/. Số câu : 2 Số điểm:0,5. Thông hiểu. Vận dụng Cấp độ thấp. Cộng. Cấp độ cao. Số câu : 6 Số điểm: 2,5. Family. Số câu : 5 Số điểm:2,5. Số câu : 5 Số điểm: 2,5. -the verb “ to be ” -wh-questions. Số câu : 3 Số điểm:0,75 Số câu : 4 Số điểm:1 Số câu : 3 Số điểm:0,75. Số câu :10 Số điểm:2,5. -preposition of place in, on, at Use there is / are and the words / phrases given to write about school / class. Số câu:5 Số điểm: 2,5. Số câu : 6 Số điểm:2,5. Số câu : 15 Số điểm: 5. Full name: ………………………. Class 6 ENGLISH WRITIEN TEST Number 1 ( time allowed 45 minutes ) I-Listening / Phonetic. Số câu : 5 Số điểm:2,5. Số câu: 5 Số câu : 25 Số điểm: Số điểm: 2,5 10 Page 35.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span> 1-Listen to the tape and fill in the blank with the word you hear.( 2 points ) This (1 ) ……… my mother. Her ( 2 ) ………. is Nga. She’s a teacher, too. And this is ( 3 ) …….. sister, Lan. She is ( 4 ) ……… . She is a student. I am her brother. 2-Choose the word that has the underlines part pronounced different from the rest.(0,5 point). A. a-rulers b-students c-lamps d-desks B. a-friends b-pens c-songs d-books II-Reading: Read .Then write the answers. ( 2,5 points ) This is my family. We are in our yard. There are five people in my family: my father, my mother, my brother, my sister and me. My father is forty-two. He is a doctor. My mother is thirty-nine. She is a nurse. My brother is ten. My sister is twelve. They are students. a-How many people are there in his family?…………………………………………………. b-How old is his father? ………………………………………………….. c-What does he do? ………………………………………………….. d-What does his mother do? ………………………………………………….. e-What do his brother and sister do? ………………………………………………….. III-Language focus: Complete these sentences with the correct answer. ( 2,5 points ) a-I ……… Mai. A- am B-is C-are b-She ……….. a teacher. A- am B-is C-are c-Mai and Lan ………. students. A- am B-is C-are d-…….. old are you ? A-how B-what C-where D-who e-………. is his name? A-how B-what C-where D-who f-………. do you live? A-how B-what C-where D-who g-……… many students are there in your class? A-how B-what C-where D-who h-I live ………… 12 Tran Phu street . A- in B-on C- at i-We live …………. Viet Nam . A-at B-on C-in j-I live ……….. Tran Hung Dao street. A-on / in B-on / at C-in / at VI-Writing: Use the words or phrases given below to write full sentences. ( 2,5 points ) This / my / classroom. ………………………………………………………………………………………………… There / forty students / my classroom. ………………………………………………………………………………………………… There / a board / my classroom. ……………………………………………………………………............................................ There / a picture / and / a clock / the wall. ………………………………………………………………………………………………… There / ten tables / and / ten benches / my classroom. .................................................................................................................................................... Page 36 Planning date: September 25th 2011. Correcting date: September 27th 2011. Total: ............ Absentees:………………… Week 7 Period 19 CORRECTING THE TEST 1 I-OBJECTIVE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span> Teacher gives opinions about the students’ knowledge. There are some main knowledge you don’t understand perfectly such as how to write sentences ( using the words or phrases given ) II-PREPARATION Teacher comments. -Listening skill is very bad. Your phonetic need to be improved. -Reading skill is good. Most of all students get good marks in this part -There are some mistakes when you do language focus test. -Writing skill needs to be improved more and more. III-CONTENT The test is not difficult, the instruction is clear. We study all in unit 1, 2, 3. Question I: Listening / Phonetic 1-Listening 2 points ( each correct word got 0,5 point ). 2-Phonetic 0,5 point ( each correct answer got 0,25 point Question II : Reading 2,5 points ( each correct answer got 0,5 point ). Question III: Language focus 2,5 points.( each correct answer got 0,25 point ). Question IV: Writing 2,5 points ( each correct answer got 0,5 point ). Question I: Listening / Phonetic ( 2,5 points ) 1-Listen to the tape and fill in the blank with the word you hear. ( 2 points ) This (1 )…is………my mother. Her ( 2 )…name…….. is Nga. She’s a teacher, too. And this is ( 3 )…my……..sister, Lan. She is ( 4 )…fifteen……….. She is a student. I am her brother. Not many students got the highest marks in this test. You remember the words very badly. name ( tên ), fifteen not fiveteen You should learn by heart all the words. 2-Choose the word that has the underlines part pronounced different from the rest.(0,5 point). A. a-rulers b-students c-lamps d-desks B. a-friends b-pens c-songs d-books You need to learn by heart how to pronounce s / s /, s / z / and es / iz / in plural noun. Ex: When s appears after a f, ph / f /, k / k / p / p /, t / t /, th /  /, s is pronounced / s / …… Question II: Read .Then write the answers.( 2,5 points ) This is my family. We are in our yard. There are five people in my family: my father, my mother, my brother, my sister and me.My father is forty-two. He is a doctor. My mother is thirty-nine. She is a nurse. My brother is ten. My sister is twelve. They are students. a-How many people are there in his family? There are five people in his family b-How old is his father? He is forty-two. c-What does he do? He is a doctor. d-What does his mother do? She is a nurse. e-What do his brother and sister do? They are students. Question III : Complete these sentences with the correct answer.( 2,5 points ) a-I………Mai. A- am B-is C-are Page 37 b-She………..a teacher. A- am B-is C-are c-Mai and Lan ……….students. A-am B-is C-are.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span> d-……..old are you ? A-how B-what C-where D-who e-……….is his name? A-how B-what C-where D-who f-……….do you live? A-how B-what C-where D-who g-………….many students are there in your class? A-how B-what C-where D-who h-I live …………12 Tran Phu street . A- in B-on C- at i-We live………….Viet Nam . A-at B-on C-in j-I live………..Tran Hung Dao street. A-on / in B-on / at C-in / at Notice how to use the verb “ to be “ I + am ….. She / he / it / Lan / my sister + is …. We / you / they / my sisters / Mai and Lan + are …….. VI-Writing: Use the words given below to write full sentences. ( 2,5 points ) This / my / classroom. This is my classroom. There / forty students / my classroom. There are forty students in my classroom. There / a board / my classroom. There is a board in my classroom. There / a picture / and / a clock / the wall. There is a picture and a clock on the wall. There / ten tables / and / ten benches / my classroom. There are ten benches and ten tables in my classroom. Notice: How to use There is + singular noun / uncountable noun. There is a picture on the wall. There are + plural noun. Notice: preposition of place in / on / at …… Ex: The picture is on the wall / on the table. The pen is in your school bag. RESULT TABLE SỒ BÀI KT 37 SỐ ĐIỂM %. ĐIỂM GIỎI 8-10. ĐIỂM KHÁ 7-8. ĐIỂM TB 5-6. ĐIỂM YẾU 3-4. ĐIỂM KÉM 1-2. Page 38 Planning date:September 26th 2011. Teaching date:September 28th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 4 BIG OR SMALL ? Week 7 Period 20 WHERE IS YOUR SCHOOL? ( A1-A2 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span> I-OBJECTIVE Reading a description of a school with practice in possessive ‘ s ‘ to talk about possessive. Vocabulary big ( adj), small ( adj ), new, old ….. Structure Is Phong’s school small? Yes, it is. Is Thu’s school small? No, it isn’t. II-PREPARATION Teacher: picture and cassette for activity 1 Students :review how to make yes-no question with “ be “. III-PROCEDURE. TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Matching. CONTENT. Do the matching I w yo th e u ey Th its u’s. 2-PRE-READING ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning of new words, new structure and help them predict the main idea of the text Pre-teach Big ( adj )- to lớn Small ( adj )- nhỏ bé In the city – trong thành phố In the country- ở nông thôn Modal sentence. Open-prediction Matching 3-WHILE-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To hep students practise reading and answering the questions Ask students to listen to the tape while reading. Ask them to read the text and correct their predictions. 39 Ask them to read the text again angd answer questions.. th eir. he r. sh e. he. it. Th u. hi s. m y. yo ur. ou r. 1-New words Big ( adj ) Small ( adj ) In the city In the country 2-Grammar structure This is Phong and that is his sister. that is Phong’s sister. That is Lien and this is her pen. this is Lien’s pen. Is Phong’s school small? Yes, it is. Is Thu’s school small? No, it isn’t. 3-Prediction big Phong’s school small in the country Thu’s school in the city. 1-Practise reading ……………………………………………... ……………………………………………... 2-Correct prediction ……………………………………………... ……………………………………………... Page 3-Questions and answer a- Is Phong’s school small? Yes, it is..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span> b-Is Thu’s school small? No, it isn’t. c-Where is Phong’s school? It is in the country. d-Is Thu’s school in the country? No, it isn’t. 4-POST-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise speaking and writing Yes / No question answer drill Your school Your house big / small ? Your brother’s school in the city / country? Your sister’s school 5-HOME WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1,2,3 on page 35-36 work book. Exercise 1: Complete the sentences. Exercise 2:Write. Exercise 3: Write the sentences.. Practise speaking and writing S1: Is your house big ? S2: Yes, it is. S3: Is your house in the country? S4: No, it isn’t. ……………………………………………... …………………………………………….... Ex: This is Hoa. This is her book. This is Hoa’s book. Ex: Nam’s television / big. Is Nam’s television big? Ex: Thu’s school / in the country Thu’s school is in the country. Is Thu’s school in the country?. Page 40 st. Planning date: October 1 2011. Teaching date: October 3rd 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 4 BIG OR SMALL ?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span> Week 8 Period 21 WHERE IS YOUR SCHOOL? ( A3-A4 ) I-OBJECTIVE Reading a text about school to understand details and get further practice in numbers and school vocabulary. Vocabylary classroom, students, one hundred, two hundred ….. Structure How many classrooms are there? There are twenty classrooms. II-PREPARATION Teacher: picture for activity 3 Studenta : big paper to do exercise 4 in groups. III-PROCEDURE. TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM UP ( 5 minutes ) -To lead students into the new lesson Ask students to look at the picture on page 45. Ask them.. 2-PRE-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To give students how to read and write the number hundreds, give them how to answer the questions which have “ or “ in. Pre-teach vocabulary. Hundred-trăm ( hàng trăm ) 100- one hundred. 134-one hundred and thirty four 200-two hundred 101-one hundred and one 880-eight hundred and eighty 555-five hundred and fifty five Model sentence Is your house big or small? -It is big. -It is small.. CONTENT Speaking a-What is this? It is a school b-Who are they? They are students. c-Where are they? They are in the school yard.. 1-New words Hundred 100- one hundred. 134-one hundred and thirty four 200-two hundred 101-one hundred and one 880-eight hundred and thirty 555-five hundred and fifty five 2-Grammar structure Is your house big or small? We can’t give the answer for this question is yes, it is or no it isn’t. We only answer our house is big / it is big if in fact our house is big or our house is small / it is small if in fact our house is small. So the question “Is your house big or small?” is answered. It is big if in fact it is big. Or it is small if in fact it is small.. 3-WHILE-READING ( 15 minutes ) -To help students practise reading and answering questions about Phong and Thu’s school Page 41 Ask students to listen to the tape while reading the text. 1-Practise reading ……………………………………………... ……………………………………………....

<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span> Ask students to read the text and then answer 2-Questions and answer questions. a-How many classroom are there in Phong’s school? There are eight classrooms. b-How many students are there in his school? There are four hundred students in his school. c-How many classrooms are there in Thu’s school? There are twenty classrooms in her school. d-How many students are there in her school? There are nine hundred students in her school. 4-POST-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise speaking and writing 1-Practise speaking Ask about students‘school. a-Is your school in the country or in the city? ……………………………………………… b-How many classrooms are there? ……………………………………………… c-How many students are there? ……………………………………………… Ask students to write something to introduce 2-Practise writing their school. Ex: My school is in the country there are …… And there are ……… ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… 5-HOME WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 4,5 on page 37-38 work book. Exercise 4: Complete the sentences. Ex: the chair / big ( v ) /small Is the chair big? Is it big? Yes ,it is. Exercise 5: Write the questions and the Ex: Mai’s house / where / in the city. answer with “where “ Where is Mai’s house? It is in the city.. Page 42 nd. Planning date: October 2 2011. Teaching date: October 4th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 4 BIG OR SMALL ?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span> Week 8 Period 22 MY CLASS ( B1-B5 ) I-OBJECTIVE Listening to a dialogue about school to understand the details, practising cardinal numbers, ordinal numbers and “which “ question to talk about school. Vocabulary to have, grade, class, floor Structure Which grade are you in ? I am in gread 6. II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette, table for activity 4 Students: table 2, 5on page 48. III-PROCEDURE. Page 43 B2: Grid ( Complete the table ). 2-Complete the table Grade. Class. Classroom’s.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span> floor Thu Phong You 4-POST-LISTENING ( 10 minutes ) -To check students’ understand. Board Drill. Ask studenst to complete the dialogue ( B5page 48 ). 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do all exercises of part B on page36, 37, 38 workbook.. 7 6. 7c 6a. 2 nd 1 st. 1-Questions and answer S1: Which grade is Phong in ? S2: He is in grade 6. S1: Which class is he in ? S2: He is in class 6A. S1:Where is his classroom? S2: It is on the first floor. 2-Complete the dialogue ( B5 ) Thu: Is your school big? Phong: No. It is small. Thu: How many floors does it have ? Phong: It has two floors. Thu: Which class are you in? Phong: I am in class 6A. Thu: Where is your classroom? Phong: It is on the first floor. ……………………………………………… ………………………………………………. Page 44 rd. Planning date:October 3 2011. Teaching date:October 5th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 4 BIG OR SMALL ?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span> Week 8 Period 23 GETTING READY FOR SCHOOL ( C1-C3 ) I-OBJECTIVE Simple present tense, positive statements with I and vocabulary of routines to talk about habitual actions Vocabulary get up, get dress, wash face, brush teeth, have breakfast, go to school. Structure What do you do every morning? I get up. Then I get dressed. II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette and picture for activity 1 Students:big papers to do exercise 3 in group.. III-PROCEDURE. TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Ask students some questions.. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words and new structure. Pre-teach vocabulary. To get up ( v )- ngủ dậy To get dress ( v )-thay đồ To brush your teeth ( v )-đánh răng To wash your face ( v )-rửa mặt To have breakfast ( v )-ăn sáng To go to school ( v )-đi học Model sentences What do you do every morning? I get up. / I brush my teeth. / I have breakfast. What does Ba He do every morning? She Ba gets up. He brushes his teeth. He has breakfast. She goes to school. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise speaking Word cue drill …… up, …… dress, …….. teeth, ……. face, …..... breakfast, …….. school,. CONTENT Speaking a-Which grade are you in? I am in grade 6. b-Which class are you in ? I am in class 6A c-Where is your classroom? It is on the second floor. 1-New words To get up ( v ) To get dress ( v ) To brush your teeth ( v ) To wash your face ( v ) To have breakfast ( v ) To go to school ( v ) 2-Grammar structure What do you do every morning? I get up. / I brush my teeth. / I have breakfast. What does Ba He do every morning? She Ba gets up. He brushes his teeth. He has breakfast. She goes to school. Practise speaking S1: What do you do every morning? S2: I get up. S1: What do you do then ? S2: I have breakfast. Page 45 S3: What does she do every morning? S4: She gets up. S3: What does she do then?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span> S4: She has breakfast. S5: What do you do every morning? S6: I get dress then I wash my face. …………………………………………….. …………………………………………….. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise writing Write it up Write five sentences about YOU do every morning. Begin with: Every morning, I get up. Then I ……. Write five sentences about Ba.Begin with : Every morning Ba gets up .Then he ……… 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1, 2 on page 41 workbook.. Practise writing Every morning I get up.Then I get dress after that I brush my teeth. Every morning Ba gets up .Then he washes his face. After that he has breakfast. Exercise 1: Match the word in column A with the word in column B. Exercise 2: Put the verbs in the correct tense.. Page 46 th. Planning date:October 8 2011. Teaching date:October10th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 4 BIG OR SMALL ?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span> Week 9 Period 24 GETTING READY FOR SCHOOL ( C4-C7 ) I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to tell the time. Vocabulary review the number one to sixty. Structure what time do you get up? / what time does Ba get up? I get up at six o’clock. He gets up at five thirty. II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette and picture for activity 4,5. Students:big papers to do exercise 7 in groups. III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Writing Number dictation Teacher reads some numbers. Students listen One ten, four thirty, five twenty, three fifteen while writing. 1.10 4.30 5.20 3.15 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give studenst the meaning , how to pronounce of new words how to ask and answwer about the time. Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words The time ( n )-thời gian The time ( n ) Ten o’clock ( n )-mười giờ đúng Ten o’clock ( n ) Half past ten ( n )-mười giờ rưỡi Half past ten ( n ) Model sentences 2-Grammar structure What time is it? It is eight o’clock. What time is it? It is eight o’clock. It is ten fifteen. It is ten fifteen. It is half past ten. It is half past ten. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help studenst practise asking and Practise speaking answering about the time. Realia drill 9.45, 6.00, 2.10, 1.30, ………. S1: What time is it? S2: It is nine fortyfive S3: What time is it? S4: It is six o’clock. S3: What time is it? S4: It is two ten. Ask some questions about Ba. a-What time does Ba get up? He gets up at six o’clock. b-What time does he have breakfast? He has breakfast at six thirty. c-What time does he go to school? He goes to school at seven fifteen. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help studenst speak and write about Page 47 themselves 1-Practise speaking Ask students a-What time do you get up? ……………………………………………….

<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span> Ask studenst to write somethings about themselves. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 3, 4, 5 on page 41, 42, 43 Exercise 3: Write the time. Exercise 4: Write question for each answer below. Exercise 5: Write about Tien. b-What time do you have breakfast? ……………………………………………… c-What time do you go to school? ……………………………………………… 2-Practise writing Ex: Every morning I get up at six o’lock. I get dress, wash my face, brush my teeth at six fifteen. I have breakfast at six thirty …… Ex: It is eight o’clock. Ex: What time do you have breakfast? Ex: Every morning Tien gets up at six o’clock.. Page 48 th. Planning date:October 9 2011. Teaching date:October11th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 5 THINGS I DO.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span> Week 9 Period 25 MY DAY ( A1-A4 ) I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about Nga’s daily routines. Vocabulary watch TV, do the house work, play game, listen to music, do homework Structure what does Nga do every day? She gets up at six. what do you do every day? I watch TV. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette and picture for activity 1, 3 Students: big paper to do exercise 2, 4 in group. III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students . a-What time do you get up? I get up at six o’clock. b-What time do you have breakfast? I have breakfast at six thirty. c-What time do you go to school? I go to school at seven o’clock. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, the form and how to use of the present simple tense. Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words To do your home work ( v )- làm bài tập ở To do your home work ( v ) nhà To play games ( v ) To play games ( v )- chơi trò chơi. To listen to music ( v ) To listen to music ( v )-nghe nhạc To watch TV ( v) To watch TV ( v)-xem TV To do the housework ( v ) To do the housework ( v )-làm việc nhà To read ( v ) To read ( v )-đọc Model sentences 2-Grammar structure What do you do every day? Everyday I go to school. I watch TV. She goes to school. What does Nga do every day? What do you do every day? She gets up at six. I watch TV. What does Nga do every day? She gets up at six. Notice I / we/ you / they / Mai and Lan / + verb ( bare-inf ) + …….. my sisters She / he / it / my sister / + verb-s / es + ….. Lan Verbs ending in ss, sh, ch, x and o add es , instead of s alone, to form the third person Page 49 singular. Ex: brush ----- brushes, do ----- does ….. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span> -To help students practise speaking Ask students to listen to the tape while reading ( A1, A3 ) Ask students to read the text again and then answer the questions ( A2- A4 ).. 1-Practise listening and reading ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… 2-Questions and answer a-What does Nga do every day? She gets up. b-What does she do every morning? She goes to school. c-What does she do every afternoon? She plays games. d-What does she do every evening? She does her homework. e-What does Lan do after school? She does the housework. f-What does Ba do after school? He watches TV. g-What does Thu do after school? She reads h-What does Nam do after school? He listens to music.. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To check students’ understand.. Ask students to use the information in the Practise speaking and then writing table below to make question and answer. Students use every morning, every He / play games Ba / get dressed She / wash her face. She / brush her teeth Nam / go to school He / have breakfast. Lan / do housework Thu / do her homework Mai / listen to music. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 3 on page 44 Write the sentences.. afternoon, every evening in their questions. S1: What does Ba do every mornig? S2: He gets dressed. S3: What does Lan do every afternoon? S4: She does the housework.. Ex: What does he do? He plays games.. Page 50 th. Planning date:October 10 2011. Teaching date:October 12th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 5 THINGS I DO.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span> Week 9 Period 26 MY DAY ( A5-A7 ) I-OBJECTIVE Simple present tense Yes / No questions and short answers to talk about daily routines. Vocabulary play soccer / volleyball / helping verb do / does Structure Do you play volleyball? Yes, I do Does she play volleyball? No, she doesn’t II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette for activity 5, 6 picture for activity 5 Students: big paper to do exercise in groups. III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students . a-What do you do after school I listen to music. b-What does Mai do after school? She plays games. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, how to ask and answer with yes / no-question in simple present. Pre-teach vocabulary. 1-New words To play volleyball ( v )-chơi bóng chuyền To play volleyball ( v ) Football-chơi bóng đá Football Sports-chơi thể thao Sports A girl ( n )-một cô gái A girl ( n ) Model sentences 2-Grammar structure a-Do you / they play volleyball? Does he / she b-Yes , I / we / they do he / she does No, I / we / they don’t ( don’t = do not ) He / she doesn’t ( doesn’t = does not ) 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise speaking Yes / no question answer drill ( A6 ) Practise speaking S1:Do you play sport? S2: Yes, do. S3: Do you watch television ? S4: No, I don’t. Grid. name Lan Nga Mai. volleyball x v x. football v x v Page 51. S1: Does Lan play volleyball? S2: No, she doesn’t. S3: Does she play football?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span> S4: Yes, she does. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise speaking and writing Find someone who. Practise speaking and writing Find someone who ……… …….watches TV …….plays football …….does the housework …….plays volleyball …….listens to music …….reads. Name. S1: Do you watch TV? S2: Yes, I do S1: A watches TV ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… 5-HOME-WORK At home do exercise 4, 5, 6 on page 45, 46, 47 work book Exercise 5: Write the questions Exercise 6: Complete the sentences Exercise 6: Answer. Ex: They play volleyball—Do they play volleyball? Ex: Does she read? Yes,she does. Ex: Do you play soccer? Yes,I do / No,I don’t.. Page 52 Planning date:October 15th 2011. Teaching date:October17th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 5 THINGS I DO Week 10 Period 27 MY ROUTINE ( B1-B2 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use the simple present perfectly by reading a picture story about Ba’s routine. Vocabulary take a shower, to eat, to start Structure review the simple present tense II-PREPARATION Teacher: picture for activity 1,a table for activity 2 Students: a table for activity 2 III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Jumbled words okhueowsr housework cthaw watch tislen listen ypal play ader read moheowkr homework 2-PRE-READING ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, predict the times table of Ba Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words to take a shower ( v )-tắm to take a shower ( v )-tắm to eat ( v )-ăn to eat ( v )-ăn to start ( v )-bắt đầu to start ( v )-bắt đầu to finish ( v )-kết thúc to finish ( v )-kết thúc to have lunch ( v )-ăn trưa to have lunch ( v )-ăn trưa to go to bed ( v )-đi ngủ to go to bed ( v )-đi ngủ 2-Prediction Open prediction Ba’s action time Ask students to predict the times in the table prediction answer for Ba without reading. get up go to school classes start classes finish have lunch go home go to bed 3-WHILE-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise reading 1-Practise listening and reading Ask students to listen to the tape while ……………………………………………… reading ……………………………………………… Ask students to read the text again and check Page 53 their prediction 2-Check predictions Ba’s action. time prediction answer.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span> get up go to school classes start classes finish have lunch go home go to bed 4-POST-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To check students ‘ understand Ask students to read the text once more then look at Ba’s time table and answer the questions.. Ask students to use their answer to write a short paragraph about Ba’s routine.. 6.00 6.45 7.00 11.15 11.30 5.00 10.00. Speaking -What time does Ba get up? He gets up at six. -What time does he go to school? He goes to school at six forty five. -What time do classes sart? They start at seven. -What time do they finish? they finish at eleven fifteen. -What time does he have lunh? He has lunch at half past eleven. -What time does he go home? He goes home at five o’clock. -What time does he go to bed? He goes to bed at ten pm. Writing it up Every morning Ba gets up at six o’clock. He goes to school at a quarter to seven ………... 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1,2,3 on page 47, 48, 49, 50 work book. Exercise1: Write the question. Ex: What time do you get up? Exercise 2:Write the question and answer Ex: What time does he get up? He gets up at 5.30.. Page 54 th. Planning date:October 16 2011. Teaching date:October18th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 5 THINGS I DO Week 10 Period 28 MY ROUTINE ( B3-B4 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use the simple present perfectly to talk about their routine. Vocabulary a quarter to …… / a quarter past ……. / half past ……… Structure review the simple present tense II-PREPARATION Teacher: a big clock Students: review the simple present. III-PROCEDURE. TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Ask students. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students how to answer the time with a quarter to / past ….. half past ….. and help the review how to usse the simple present tense a quarter = ¼ a quarter to ten = nine forty five a quarter past ten = ten fifteen a half = ½ half past one = one thirty. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise using this tense to. CONTENT Speaking What time do you get up? ……………………………………………… What time do you have breakfast? ……………………………………………… What time do you go to school? ……………………………………………… What time do you do your home work? ……………………………………………… Grammar structure a quarter = ¼ a quarter to ten = nine forty five a quarter past ten = ten fifteen a half = ½ half past one = one thirty 1-Talk about the time What time is it? It is a quarter to ten / a quarter past ten It is half past one 2-Revision the simple present tense Affirmative Subject + verb-( s / es ) + ……….. I / we / you / they / my sisters / Mai and Lan + V ( bare-inf ) + ….. she / he / it / my sister / Mai + verb-( s / es ) +.. Negative S + don’t + V ( bare-inf ) + ... ( don’t = do not ) S + doesn’t +V ( bare-inf ) ..... ( doesn’t = does not ) Interrogative Do + S + V ......? Yes, + S + do. No + S + don’t. Does + S + V ...? Yes, + S + does. No, + S + doesn’t. Page 55 we use this tense to talk about daily routine. Practise speaking -What time do you get up?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span> talk about their daily routine. Ask students. I get up at a quarter to six. -What time do you go to school? I go to shool at half past six. -What time do you have classes? I have classes at a quarter past seven. -What time do you have lunch? I have lunch at twelve. -What time do you go home ? I go home at five o’clock. -What time do you go to bed? I go to bed at half past nine.. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise writing Ask students to use the answer above to write a short paragraph about their daily routine.. Write it up Every morning I get up at a quarter to six. I get dressed, brush my teeth, wash my face. I have breakfast at half past six. I go to school at a quarter to seven. I have classes at seven thirty. My classes finish at eleven forty five. I have lunch at twelve o’clock ....................... 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 3 on page 49-50 work book. Exercise 3: Complete the sentences about Hoa’s day.. Ex: Then she has a shower.. Page 56 Planning date:October 17th 2011. Teaching date:October19th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 5 THINGS I DO Week 10 Period 29 CLASSES ( C1 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand school subjects vocabulary with “ have / don’t have “ to talk about the school timetable. Vocabulary math, literature, history, geography Structure What do you have to day? We have English. I don’t have my timetable. II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette and real objects Students:big paper to do exercise in group. III-PROCEDURE. TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Ask students some questions.. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words and new structure Pre-teach vocabulary A timetable ( n )-thời khóa biểu English ( n )-tiếng anh Math ( n )-môn toán Literature ( n )-môn văn History ( n )-môn lịch sử Geography ( n )-môn địa lý Monday ( n )-thứ hai Model sentences. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise speaking Word cue drill English / 7.00. Math / 7.50. Literature / 8.40. History / 9.35 Geography / 10.15. CONTENT Speaking a-What time do you get up? ……………………………............................ b-What time do you have breakfast? ……………………………………................ c-What time do you go to school? …………………………………..................... 1-New words A timetable ( n ) English ( n ) Math ( n ) Literature ( n ) History ( n ) Geography ( n ) Monday ( n ) 2-Grammar structure What do we have to day? ( question with WH ) We have English. ( affirmative ) I don’t have my timetable. ( negative ) ( don’t =do not ) 1-Practise speaking S1: What do we have to day? S2: We have English. S1: What time does it start? S2: It starts at 7.00 S3: What do we have to day? S4: We have literature. Page 57. Ask students to listen to the tape while reading ( C1-page 58 ).. S3: What time does it start? S4: It starts at 8.40. 2-Practise listening and reading .........................................................................

<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span> ........................................................................ 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise writing Mapped dialogue What ….. to day ? History What time …. start? 7.50 Do we .. literature …. 8.40? No … English What time …. finish? 9.25 What ….. at 9.35? Geography Do we ….. math? Yes … 10.15. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1, 2 on page 50-51 workbook. Exercise 1: Fill in the spaces. Exercise 2: Match. Write it up A: What do we have today? B: We have history. A: What time does it start? B: It starts at 7.50 A:Do we have literature at 8.40? B: No we don’t. We have English. A: What time does it finish? B: It finishes at 9.25. A: What time do we have at 9.35? B: We have geography. A: Do we have math? B: Yes, we do. We have it at 10.15. Ex: a-Monday Ex: Geography-----Địa lý. Page 58 Planning date:October 22nd 2011. Teaching date:October24th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 5 THINGS I DO Week 11 Period 30 CLASSES ( C2-C3 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand days of the week vocabulary with “ has / doesn’t have “ to talk about the weekly timetable. Vocabulary Monday ( n ), Tuesday ( n ), Wednesday ( n ) Structure When do we have history? We have it on Tuesday and Thursday. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette for activity 2, 3 Students:a calendar III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students some questions. a-What do we have to day? We have math and literature. b-What time we have math? We have it at 7.30. c-Do we have literature at 10.00? Yes, we do. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, help them predict the content of the dialogue Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words Monday ( n )-thứ hai Monday ( n ) Tuesday ( n )-thứ ba Tuesday ( n ) Wednesday ( n )-thứ tư Wednesday ( n ) Thursday ( n )-thứ năm Thursday ( n ) Friday ( n )-thứ sáu Friday ( n ) Saturday ( n )-thứ bảy Saturday ( n ) Sunday ( n )-chủ nhật Sunday ( n ) Predict dialogue 2-Prediction Nga: When do we have …………….? Ba: We have it on ………. And ………. Nga: When do we have ……………..? Ba: We have it on ………. And ……….. Nga: Does Lan have math on ………..? Ba: …………………………………… Ask students to listen to dialogue 3 while 3-Practise listening and reading and check reading. prediction Ask them to check their prediction. ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise speaking Ask students tolook at the time table, ask and answer the questions Page 59 Board drill Thứ2 Thứ3 Thứ4 Thứ5 Thứ6 Thứ7 Toán Văn Toán Anh Văn Toán Toán Văn Toán Thể Văn Sinh Sử Anh Địa dục Sử Địa.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span> Gdcd Anh. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise writing Write it up Ask students to look at their timetable and write. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 3 on page 51 workbook. Sinh. Mĩ thuật. Kĩ thuật. Ex: When do we have math? We have it on Monday and Wednesday. When do you have literature? I have it on Tuesday and Friday.. Ex: We have math on Monday, Wednesday and Saturday. We have English on Tuesday, Thursday. Ex: He / literature / Monday When does he have literature? He has it on Monday.. Page 60 rd. Planning date: October 23 2011. Teaching date: October 25th 2011. Total: ........... Absentees:……………………. Week 11 Period 31 GRAMMAR PRACTICE I-OBJECTIVE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span> Further practice in simple present tense, telling the time, adjectives with “ be “, question words, school subjects, days of the week. Vocabulary school subjects, days of the week. Structure review the simple present tense II-PREPARATION Teacher: picture for activity 2,cards for activity 3, 5 Students:write all exercises in grammar practice in their notebooks. III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students to look at the clocks in a-What time is it? It is seven o’clock. grammar practice 2. Ask and answer. b-It is nine fifteen / a quarter past nine. c-It is four thirty / half past four. d-It is twelve. e-It is one forty five / a quarter to two. f-It is eight fifty / ten to nine. 2-PRESENTATION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students remember the form and Grammar structure how to use of the present simple tense -Subject + verb-( s / es ) + ……….. Ask students to give the form and how to use I / we / you / they / of the simple present tense my sisters / Mai and Lan + V ( bare-inf ) + ….. she / he / it / my sister / Mai + verb-( s / es ) +.. Notice: verb ending in ss, sh, ch, x and o add es, instead of s alone. When y follows a consonant we change y into i and add es. But verbs ending in y following a vowel obey the usual rule. -S + don’t + V ( bare-inf ) + ....( don’t = do not ) S + doesn’t +V ( bare-inf )...(doesn’t = doesnot ) -Do + S + V ......? Yes, + S + do. No + S + don’t. Does + S + V ...? Yes, + S + does. No, + S + doesn’t. We use this tense to talk about daily routine. Question words What / where / when / how / what time ……. Adjective and the verb “ to be “ Is your house big? Yes,it is. Is your school small ? No,it isn’t. 3-PRACTICE ( 15 minutes ) -To help students practise using the simple Practise speaking present, adjectives, question words Grammar practice 1 What time do you get up? I get up at six. What time do they go to school? Page 61 They go to school at 7.15. What time does she have breakfast? She has breakfast at 6.30. Does he wash his face in the morning?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span> Yes. He washes his face. Grammar practice 4 a-Where is your house? It is on Mai Dich street. b-How many floors does it have? It has two floors. c-What school do you go to? I go to Cau Giay school. d-Which grade are you in? I am in grade 6. Grammar practice 5 a-When do you have literature? We have it on Monday, Wednesday and Saturday. b-Which classes do you have on Friday? We have math, geography, history ….. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise writing. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do all exercises in grammar practice in your notebooks.. Practise writing Grammar practice 6 ( answer the questions ) What time do you get up ? I get up at five. Do you help your mom? Yes, I do. Do you go to the store? No, I don’t. What time do classes start? They start at 7.30 What time do classes end? They end at 11.45. Grammar practice 7 ( present simple tense ) What time does Chi get up? She gets up at 6. Doe she take a shower? Yes. She takes a shower everyday. Does she brush her teeth? Yes, she brushes her teeth everyday. What time does she have breakfast? She has breakfast at 7. What time does she go to school? She goes to shool at 8. ……………………………………………… ………………………………………………. Page 62 Planning date:October 24th 2011. Teaching date:October 26th 2011. UNIT 6 Week 11. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… PLACES Period 32 OUR HOUSE ( A1-A2 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the details and practise country vocabulary by reading a text about where Thuy lives. Vocabulary a lake , a river, a park, a hotel , near, in …… Structure what is ther near the house? there is a park near the house. II-PREPARATION Teacher: picture and cassette for activity 1 Students: pictures for activity 3 III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students to use there is……/ there are There is a door in my classroom. …….to describe their classroom. There are five windows. There is a board. There are twenty students in my classroom. 2-PRE-READING ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, predict the things near Thuy’s house. Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New owrds A lake ( n )-cái hồ A lake ( n ) A river ( n )-con sông A river ( n ) A tree ( n )-cái cây A tree ( n ) A flower ( n )-bông hoa A flower ( n ) A rice paddy ( n )-cánh đồng A rice paddy ( n ) A park ( n )-công viên A park ( n ) Open prediction 2-Prediction What is near Thuy’s house? There is a park. Ask students to write three things around There is a rice paddy. Thuy’s house. There is a river. 3-WHILE-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise reading and help them check their prediction and answer the questions 1-Practise listening and reading Ask students to listen to the tape while ……………………………………………… reading. ……………………………………………… Ask them to read the text again and check 2-Checking prediction their prediction. ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… Comprehension question 3-Question and answer a-How old is Thuy? She is twelve years old. b-What does she do? She is a student. c-What is her brother’s name? Page 63 His name is Minh. d-How old is he? He is twenty years old. e-Where does Thuy live?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span> She lives in a house. f-What is there near the house? There is a river,a hotel, a park and a rice paddy near the house. 4-POST-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To check students’ understand. Ask studenst to look at the pictures on page 62 and answer the questions. Picture drill. Ask studenst to write five sentences to describe things around their house.. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1, 2, 3 on page 60, 61, 62 workbook. Exercise 1: Write the questions and answer. 2: Write sentences with there is…./ there are….. 3: Complete the sentences. 1-Speaking a-What is that? It is a river. b-Whar are those? They are trees. c-What is that? It is a park. d-What are those? They are boats 2-Write it up There is a rice paddy near my house. There are trees near the rice paddy. ……………………………………………… ………………………………………………. Ex: What is this? It is a house. Ex: There is a TV, there are two armchairs. Ex:There is a park near the house.. Page 64 Planning date:October 29th 2011. Teaching date:October 31st 2011. UNIT 6 Week 12. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… PLACES Period 33 OUR HOUSE ( A3-A6 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand and use town and country vocabulary to describe places where they live. Vocabulary review words which have in lesson 32 Struture There is a hotel near our house. There are trees and flowers in the park. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette for activity 4 Students:picture for activity 5. III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To lead students into the new lesson Listening ( revision the words in lesson 32 ) Ask students to listen to the tape and tick ( v ) on the word they hear. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce newv words, review there is ….. / there are …… how to pronounce s / es in plural nouns. Pre-teach vocabulary A town ( n )-thị trấn, thị xã A village ( n )-làng,xã A city ( n )-thành phố The country ( n )-vung nông thôn, vùng quê Modal sentence. ( plural noun = singular noun + s / es ) -s is pronounced / s / after a f, ph / f /, k / k / p / p /, t / t /, th /  /. -s is pronounced / z / after a b / b /, d / d /, g / g /, l / l /, m / m /, n / n / ng /  /, or vowel + r / r / and vowel sounds -s is pronounced / iz / after a ge /  /, se, ze / z / -es is pronounced / iz / after a ch /  /, sh /  /, ss / s /, x / ks / 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ). CONTENT. Listening house town rice paddy. hotel country river. school city lake. village yard. 1-New words A town ( n ) A village ( n ) A city ( n ) The country ( n ) 2-Grammar strucutre ( revision ) There is + singular noun. Ex: There is a board on the wall. There is a pen in the box. There are + plural noun. Ex: There are twenty students in this room. There are ten tables in my classroom. 3-Pronunciation A book ----- books, a lamp ------ lamps A friend ----- friends, a pen --- pens, a song ----- songs a chair ---- chairs, a door --- doors, an eye --eyes. An orange --- oranges, a nose ----- noses A couch ---- couches, a box --- boxes A boss --- bosses Page 65. -To help students practise speaking and writing Askstudents to look at the pictures on page 63. Complete the sentences ( speak and then. Practise speaking and writing a-Our house has a yard. It is near a rice paddy. b-There is a hotel near the lake..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span> write ) 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise writing Ask students to look at the pictures on page 64. Find the word for each picture and then write sentences with there is … / there are …. 5-HOME WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1 on page 62 workbook. Exercise1: Fill in the correct verb form.. c-There is a river and a park. d-There are trees and flowers in the park. Practise writing -picture a: a hotel. -picture b: trees -picture c: a river -picture d: a lake -picture e: a school -picture f: a paddy field There is a hotel near our house. There are trees near our house. There is a river near my house. There is a lake near my house There is a school near our house. There is a rice paddy near our house.. Ex: We live in a house.. Page 66 Planning date:October 30th 2011. Teaching date:November 1st 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: ……………………….. UNIT 6 PLACES Week 12 Period 34 IN THE CITY ( B1-B4 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span> I-OBJECTIVE Reading a text about where Minh lives to understand town vocabulary and prepositions of place. Vocabulary hospital, factory, museum, stadium, restaurant, bookstore …… Structure Their house is next to a store. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette and picture for activity 1 Students:write exercise 3 on a big paper.. III-PROCEDURE. TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Ask students to describe their places.. 2-PRE-READING ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, predict something near Minh’s house. Pre-teach vocabulary A bookstore ( n )-cửa hàng sách A restaurant ( n )-quán ăn A temple ( n )-ngôi chùa A hospital ( n )-bệnh viện A factory ( n )-nhà máy A museum ( n )-viện bảo tàng A stadium ( n )-sân vận động In ( pre )-ở trong On ( pre )-ở trên Near ( pre )-ở gần Next to ( pre )-bên cạnh Neighborhood ( n )-vùng lân cận To work ( v )-làm việc True or False prediction. 3-WHILE-READING ( 15 minutes ) -To help students practise reading, check their prediction and summarize content of the text. Ask students to listen to the tape while reading the text Ask students to read the text once more and do exercise B1.. CONTENT Speaking Ex: There is a lake near my house. There are tall trees around my house. ........................................................................ ………………………………………………. 1-New words A bookstore ( n ) A restaurant ( n ) A temple ( n ) A hospital ( n ) A factory ( n ) A museum ( n ) A stadium ( n ) In ( pre ) On ( pre ) Near ( pre ) Next to ( pre ) Neighborhood ( n ) To work ( v ) 2-Prediction Near Minh’s house ………………………… a-There is a restaurant. b-There is a lake. c-There is a hospital.. 1-Practise listening and reading ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… Page 67 2-True or false a-F: Minh lives in the country. b-T: There are four people in his family. c-F: Their house is next to a bookstore..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span> Ask students to read the text once more and do exercise B2.. 4-POST-READING ( 5 minutes ) -To help students remember new words Dictation Ask students to listen to the tape and tick v on the word they hear then write down ( without looking at the books ).. d-F: There is a museum near their house. e-F: Minh’s mother works in a factory. f-F: Minh’s father works in a hospital. 3-Complete the sentences a-Minh and his family live in the city. b-On the street,there is a restaurant, abookstore and a temple. c-His mother works in a hospital. d-Minh’s house is next to a store. e-His father works in a factory. Wrriting Museum v Resta urant Park Hotel -museum -bookstore -street. Stadium. Temple. Hospital. Store. Book storev Lake Street v. Factory. River v House. Yard Tree. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 2 on page 63 workbook. Minh’s mother works in a hospital .( where ) Exercise 2: Write the question. Where does Minh’s mother work?. Page 68 st. Planning date: October 31 Teaching date:November 2nd UNIT 6 Week 12. 2011. 2011. Total: ………. Absentees:……………………… PLACES Period 35 AROUND THE HOUSE ( C1-C2 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand prepositions of place in front of, behind, to the left of and to the right of to describe the position of a house. Vocabulary behind, in front of, to the left of, to the right of, mountain, well Structure There is a big yard in front of the house. II-PREPARATION Teacher:picture and cassette for activity 1 Students:picture for activity 2. III-PROCEDURE. TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Ask students.. 2-PREPOSITION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words Pre-teach vocabulary In front of ( pre )-đằng trước Behind ( pre )-đằng sau To the left of….. ( pre )- bên trái To the right of… ( pre )-bên phải A well ( n )-cái giếng A mountain ( n )-ngọn núi Tall ( adj )-cao Presentation text. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise reading and answer questions ( using prepositions of place ) Ask students to listen to the tape while reading. ( C1 ) Ask students to read the text again and answer questions. Comprehension questions. CONTENT Speaking a-Where do you live? I live in a village. b-Where does she live? She lives near a lake. c-Where do they live? They live next to a river.. 1-New words In front of ( pre ) Behind ( pre ) To the left of….. ( pre ) To the right of… ( pre ) A well ( n ) A mountain ( n ) Tall ( adj ) 2-Grammar structure In front of the house, there is a big yard. There are tall trees behind the house. ……………………………………………… ………………………………………………. 1-Practise listening and reading ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… 2-Question and answer a-Where is the yard? The yard is in fron of the house. b-Where are the tall trees? Page 69 The tall trees are behind the house. c-Where are the mountains? The mountains are behind the tall trees. d-Where is the well?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span> The well is to the left of the house. e-Where are the flowers? They are to the right of the house. f-Where is the house? It is between the well and the flowers. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise listening and writing. Ask students to listen to the tape and choose the right picture. Write it up. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1, 2 on page 63-64 workbook. Exercise1: Where is the cat?-It is on the box. Exercise 2: Write the answer.. Planning date:November 5th Teaching date:November 5th UNIT 6 Week 13. 1-Practise listening a-Which is Ba’s house? Picture A. b-Which is Lan’s house? Picture B c-Which is Tuan’s house? Picture B 2-Practise writing - There are a lot of flowers in front of Ba’s house. -There are tall trees to the right of Lan’s house. - There is a well to the left of Tuan’s house and there are some flowers to the right.. It is on the box. Where is the school? It is to the right of the museum.. Page 70 2011. 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… PLACES Period 36 AROUND THE HOUSE ( C3-C5 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson,students will be able to understand “ Where is …….. / are ……? “ questions and answer with town vocabulary and prepositions of place to describe a street. Vocabulary the drugstore, the toystore, the movie theater, the police station Structure Where is the movie theater? It is between the bakery and the drugstore. II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette for activity 3 Students:picture for activity 3 III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students to look at the picture on page There are trees behind the house. 68 in 30 seconds then close their books and There is a well to the left of the house. describe the picture. There are flowers to the right of the house. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, review how to use prepositions of place. Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words the drugstore ( n )-cửa hàng bán thuốc the drugstore ( n ) the toystore ( n )-cửa hàng đồ chơi the toystore ( n ) the movie theater ( n )-rạp chiếu phim the movie theater ( n ) the police station ( n )-đồn cảnh sát the police station ( n ) the bakery ( n )-tiệm bánh mì the bakery ( n ) between ( pre )-ở giữa between ( pre ) opposite ( pre )-đối diện opposite ( pre ) Presentation text 2-Grammar structure The movie theater is between the bakery and the drugstore. The restaurant is opposite the drugstore. ........................................................................ …………………………………………........ 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise speaking ( using prepositions of place ). Ask students to listen to the tape while 1-Practise listening and reading reading the text ( C3-page 70 ) ……………………………………………… Ask students to read the text again and 2-Question and answer answer questions. a-Where is the photocopy store? …………………………………………........ b-Where is the restaurant? ……………………………………………… c- Where are the children? …………………………………………........ Page 71 d-Where is the toystore? …………………………………………....... Guessing game 3-Speaking a-It is opposite the bakery. What is it?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span> It is the toystore. b-It is between the bakery and the drugstore.What is it? It is the movie theater. c-It is next to the bakery.What is it? It is the photocopy store. d-It is opposite the bookstore. What is it? It is the drugstore. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students use prepositions of place to describe the scenery around their houses Survey. Speaking name. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 3 on page 65 work book. Look at the map in exercise 2. Give the answers to the questions.. in front of. behind. oppo site. to the left of. to the right of. near. Ex: What is in front of your house? A lake. What are behind your house? Trees. Ex: what is opposite the restaurant? The movie theater.. Page 72 th. Planning date:November 6 2011. Teaching date:November 8th 2011. Week 13 Period 37 I-OBJECTIVE. Total: ……… Absentees: ……………………… CONSOLIDATION.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span> By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use perfectly the present simple to talk about habitual actions. Vocabulary all words from unit to unit 6 Structure the simple present tense ( revision ) II-PREPARATION Teacher: form of the simple present on a big paper Students: review this tenses carefully at home III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students to give examples ( using simple I go to school in the mornings. present tense ) She doesn’t watch TV in the evenings. They don’t have breakfast at 6. They have breakfast at 6.30. 2-PRESENTATION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students remember the form and how to use of the present simple tense. Revision Grammar structure The present simple tense. The present simple Affirmative Subject + V ( s / es ) + O / A …. Negative Subject + don’t / doesn’t + V ( bare-inf ) + O /A. Interrogative Do / does + subject + V ( bare-inf ) + O / A ? Yes, + subject + do / does. No, + subject + don’t / doesn’t. How to use: to express habitual actions. Notice: verbs ending in ss, sh, ch, x and o add es to form the third person. Ex: I watch ---- she watches… They wash---- my mother washes… We miss----- she misses… I go -----he goes… when y follows a consonant we change the y into i and add es. Ex: I carry ------ she carries.. We try---- she tries… But verbs ending in y following a vowel obay the usual rule. I say--------he says….. 3-PRACTICE ( 15 minutes ) -To help students practise using the present Practise speaking simple tense. Page 73 Put the verb in each bracket into the simple present tense. a-How many rooms your house ( have )? a-How many rooms does your house ( have ) have ?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span> b-There ( be ) 29 classrooms in my school? c-Thu’s bag ( be ) small? No they ( not be ). d-Minh ( get ) dressed and ( watch ) his face at 6.30. e-I ( be ) in grade 12 and my brother ( be ) in grade 7. f-What time your children ( go ) to school? g-They ( lives ) on 10th floor. h-Viet ( not have 0 literature on Friday. i-What time you ( start ) your classes? j-You ( be ) in class 11 A? k-Every evening my father ( watch ) TV. l-My sister ( have ) breakfast and ( go ) to school at 6.30 every morning. m-We ( not read ) books after lunch. n-Tom ( be ) my friend. He ( play ) sports everyday. p-Your students ( play ) soccer every afternoon? 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students to write the things they do every day. Ask students to write five things they do every day ( using the simple present tense ). b-There ( be ) are 29 classrooms in my school. c-Are Thu’s bags ( be ) small? No they ( not be ) aren’t. d-Minh ( get ) gets dressed and ( watch ) watches his face at 6.30. e-I ( be ) am in grade 12 and my brother ( be ) is in grade 7. f-What time do your children ( go ) go to school? g-They ( live ) live on 10th floor. h-Viet ( not have )ldon’t have literature on Friday. i-What time do you ( start ) start classes? j-Are you ( be ) in class 11 A? k-Every evening my father ( watch ) watches TV. l-My sister ( have ) has breakfast and ( go ) goes to school at 6.30 every morning. m-We ( not read ) don’t read books after lunch. n-Tom ( be ) is my friend. He ( play ) plays sports everyday. p-Do your students ( play ) play soccer every afternoon? Practise writing Every morning I get up at six. I have breakfast at 6.30. I go to school at 7 o’clock. ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… ………………………………………………. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home review words and structures, words you learnt from unit 3 to unit 6. You are going to have a test next lesson.. ……………………………………………… ………………………………………………. Page 74 Planning date: November 7th 2011. Testingdate: November 9th 2011. Week 13 Period 38 I-OBJECTIVE. Total: ........... Absentees: ……………………. WRITTEN TEST 2.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span> Themes / topics:Education ( School facilities & activities, Children’s life in school ) Language focus: Vocabulary ( words to describe school facilities and to talk about school subjects words to describe a time table and time ) Grammar structures: Present simple tense, wh-question, Yes-No question, possessive of case, adjectives and preposition of time and place) II-PREPARATION Teacher: Photocopy paper tests Students:Revise from unit 4 to unit 6 :Vocabulary (words to describe school facilities and to talk about school subjects words to describe a time table and time ) Grammar structures: Present simple tense, wh-question, Yes-No question, possessive of case, adjectives and preposition of time and place). III-FORM OF THE TEST Tên / Chủ đề School facilities and activities, Children’s life in school I-Listening -Listen for specific information -Phonetic 25 % II-Reading -Question and answer 25 % III-Language focus -complete the paragraph -correct form of the verb 25 % IV-Writing -rewiting -Use there is / are and the words or phrases given to write the full sentences 25 % Tổng số: 100 %. Nội dung cần kiểm tra. Nhận biết. Thông hiểu. Vận dụng Cấp độ Cấp độ thấp cao. Số câu : 7 Số điểm:2,5. school subject, Số câu: 3 days of the week Số điểm: 1,5 /  / , /  / ,/  / , / k / General information. Cộng. Số câu : 4 Số điểm:1 Số câu : 4 Số điểm: 2. adjective noun preposition. Số câu : 1 Số điểm: 0,5. Số câu : 5 Số điểm:2,5. Số câu : 5 Số điểm: 1 Số câu: 3 Số điểm:1,5. Số câu : 8 Số điểm:2,5. the simple present tense Use the verb have, pre Use words / phrases given to write about Hoa’s activities each day.. Số câu:7 Số điểm: 2,5. Số câu : 11 Số điểm:4,5. Số câu : 9 Số điểm: 3. Full name:………………………….. Class 6 ENGLISH WRITTEN TEST NUMBER 2 I-Listening / Phonetic 1-Listen to the tape and complete the dialogue below. ( 1,5 points ). Số câu : 6 Số điểm:2,5. Số câu: 7 Số câu : 27 Số điểm: Số điểm:10 2,5 Page 75.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span> Nga: When do we have ( 1 ) …………….. ? Ba: We have it on ( 2 )……………. and ( 3 ) ………………… 2-Choose the word that has the underlines part pronounced different from the rest .( 1 point). 4. A-stool B-room C-afternoon D-door 5. A-breakfast B-teacher C-ready D-heavy 6. A-engineer B-greeting C-teeth D-street 7. A-chair B-school C-couch D-children II-Reading. Read the paragraph below and then answer the questions. ( 2,5 points ) This is my friend. Her name is Linh. She goes to school from Monday to Saturday. Her School is on Nguyen Cao street and it is big. It has five floors. Linh’s classroom is on the 3rd floor. Linh is in grade 6, class 6A. There are thirty-two students in her class. Linh starts her classes at 2 o’clock in the afternoon and finishes them at 4.30. On Monday she has math literature and English. After school Linh plays badminton, but her friend, Lien doesn’t play it; she plays volleyball. Linh goes home at 5.30 8-Where is Linh’s school? ......................................................................................................... 9-How many floors does her school have? ............................................................................... 10-Which class is Linh in ? ..…………………………………………………………………. 11-What time does Linh start her classes? ………………………………………………… 12-Does Lien play badminton? ……………………………………………………………….. III-Language focus 1-Complete the passage below ( use the words given ) ( 1 point ) large chairs bookshelf near dictionary This is Nam’s room. His room is not very ( 13 ) ……….. There are two ( 14 ) ………, a table, a bed, a wardrobe and a ( 15 ) ………. in his room. The table is ( 16 ) ……….the window. There is an ink-pot, some books and an English-Vietnamese ( 17 ) ……… on the table …… 2-Give the correct form of each verb in brackets ( 1,5 points ) 18-She ( listen ) …………… to the radio in the afternoons. 19-They ( not have ) …………….. dinner at 7 p.m. 20-……. she ( get ) ……… up at 5.30? IV: Writing 1-Read the first sentence , and then complete the second sentence with the same meaning. ( 0,5 point ) 21-There are ten tables and ten couches in the classroom. The classroom ………………………………………………………………………………… 22-My house is behind the hotel. The hotel ……………………………………………………………………………………… 2-Use the words or phrases given below to write sentences about Hoa.( 2 points ) 23-Every morning / Hoa / get / at 5.30. ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 24-She / brush / teeth / , / wash / face / and / have / breakfast / at / 6.15. ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 25-She / go / school / 7 o’clock. ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 26-Her / classes / start / 7.30 / and finish / at / 11.30. ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 27-In / afternoon / she / stay / home / and / do / her / homework. ..................................................................................................................................... Page 76 Planning date: November 12th 2011. Correcting date: November 14th 2011. Total: ............ Absentees:………………… Week 14 Period 39 CORRECTING THE TEST 2 I-OBJECTIVE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span> Teacher gives opinions about the students’ knowledge. There are some main knowledge you don’t understand perfectly such as how to write sentences ( using the words or phrases given ) II-PREPARATION Teacher comments. -Listening skill is very bad. Your phonetic need to be improved. -Reading skill is good. Most of all students get good marks in this part -There are some mistakes when you do language focus test. -Writing skill needs to be improved more and more. III-CONTENT The test is not difficult, the instruction is clear. We study all in unit 4, 5, 6. Question I: Listening / Phonetic 1-Listening 1,5 points ( each correct word got 0,5 point ). 2-Phonetic 1 point ( each correct answer got 0,25 point Question II : Reading 2,5 points ( each correct answer got 0,5 point ). Question III: Language focus 2,5 points. 1-Vocabulary 1 point ( each correct answer got 0,2 point ). 2-The correct form of the verb 1,5 points ( each correct sentence got 0,5 point ) Question IV: Writing 2,5 points 1-Rewriting 0,5 point ( each correct answer got 0,25 point ). 2-Writing 2 points ( each correct sentence got o,4 point ) I-Listening / Phonetic 1-Listen to the tape and complete the dialogue below. ( 1,5 points ) Nga: When do we have ( 1 ) history ? Ba: We have it on ( 2 ) Tuesday and ( 3 ) Thursday ………. Not many students got the highest marks in this test. You remember the words very badly. There are many errors here. At home you have to learn by heart words for school subject, word for day of the week. 2-Choose the word that has the underlines part pronounced different from the rest .( 1 point). 4. A-stool B-room C-afternoon D-door 5. A-breakfast B-teacher C-ready D-heavy 6. A-engineer B-greeting C-teeth D-street 7. A-chair B-school C-couch D-children You need to distinguish /  / and /  /, /  / and /  / , / k / and /  /. II-Reading. Read the paragraph below and then answer the questions. ( 2,5 points ) 8-Where is Linh’s school? It is on Nguyen Cao street. 9-How many floors does her school have? It has five floors. 10-Which class is Linh in ? She is in class 6A. 11-What time does Linh start her classes? She starts her classes at 2 o’clock in the afternoon. 12-Does Lien play badminton? No, she doesn’t. You did this exercise very well. Please keep it in the next exams. III-Language focus. 1-Complete the passage below ( use the words given ) ( 1 point ). large chairs bookshelf near dictionary This is Nam’s room. His room is not very ( 13 ) large. There are two ( 14 ) chairs, a table, Page 77 a bed, a wardrobe and a ( 15 ) bookshelf in his room. The table is ( 16 ) near the window. There is an ink-pot, some books and an English-Vietnamese ( 17 ) dictionary on the table … You did this exercise very well. You all got the highest marks. Please keep it in the next exams..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span> 2-Give the correct form of each verb in brackets ( 1,5 points ) 18-She ( listen ) listens to the radio in the afternoons. 19-They ( not have ) don’t have dinner at 7 p.m. 20-Does she ( get ) get up at 5.30? There are many errors here. To do this exercise well, you have to learnt by heart all the forms in the simple present tense. -affirmative: Subject + V ( s / es ) + O / A. ( verb ending in ss, sh, ch, o and x + es ) -negative: Subject + don’t / doesn’t + V ( bare-inf ) + O / A. -interrogative: Do / does + Subject + V ( bare-inf ) + O / A? IV: Writing 1-Read the first sentence , and then complete the second sentence with the same meaning. ( 0,5 point ) 21-There are ten tables and ten couches in the classroom. The classroom has ten tables and ten couches. 22-My house is behind the hotel. The hotel is in front of my house. Remember. Ex: there is a TV in this room = this room has a TV. There are ten chairs in my classroom = my classrom has ten chairs. A is behind ( the ) B = B is in front of ( the ) A. C is to the left of ( the ) D = D is to the right of ( the ) C. 2-Use the words or phrases given below to write sentences about Hoa.( 2 points ) 23-Every morning / Hoa / get / at 5.30. Every morning Hoa gets up at 5.30. 24-She / brush / teeth / , / wash / face / and / have / breakfast / at / 6.15. She brushes teeth, washes face and has breakfast at 6.15. 25-She / go / school / 7 o’clock. She goes school at 7 o’clock. 26-Her / classes / start / 7.30 / and finish / at / 11.30. Her classes start at 7.30 and finish at 11.30. 27-In / afternoon / she / stay / home / and / do / her / homework. In the afternoon she stays at home and does her homework. There are many mistekes in this exercise. To do this exercise well you have to read the texts and the dialogues which you have learnt more many times. You also have to remember the form for the simple present tense. Ex: Hoa gets ….. / she brushes …… / washes ….. she has ….. Classes start-not starts here…… she stays ……. she does-not do here ….. RESULT TABLE SỒ BÀI KT 37 SỐ ĐIỂM %. ĐIỂM GIỎI 8-10. ĐIỂM KHÁ 7-8. ĐIỂM TB 5-6. ĐIỂM YẾU 3-4. ĐIỂM KÉM 1-2. Page 78 th. Planning date:November13 2011. Teaching date:November15th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: ………………………. UNIT 7 YOUR HOUSE Week 14 Period 40 IS YOUR HOUSE BIG? ( A1-A2 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span> I-OBJECTIVE Listening to a dialogue and reading a letter about a house to understand the details. Vocabulary old, new, beautiful, vegetable garden Structure Is it new? Yes, it is / No, it isn’t Is there a garden? Yes, there is / No, there isn’t Are there any trees ? Yes, there are / No, there aren’t II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette for activity 1,2 Students:picture for activity 1,2 III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To lead students into new lesson Speaking Ask students to look at the picture on page a-How many people are there in the picture? 72. Ask them. …………………………………………....... b-Are there any flowers ? …………………………………………...... c-Is the house big or small, new or old ? ……………………………………………... 2-PRE-LISTENING / READING ( 15 minutes ) -To help students predict something about Hoa’s house and give the meaning of new words. Pre-listening 1-Prediction Ask students to think of Hoa’s house and Yes No predict, then tick yes or no. Is her house big? old? Is there a yard? well? Are there any flowers? trees? Pre-reading Pre-teach vocabulary 2-New words Old ( adj )-cũ, già, cổ Old ( adj ) New ( adj )-mới New ( adj ) Beautiful ( adj )-đẹp Beautiful ( adj ) A garden ( n )-vườn A garden ( n ) A photo ( n )-bức ảnh A photo ( n ) True / False prediction 3-True / false statement Ask students to predict something about The sentence Prediction Answer Nga’s house. a-The house is in the T country. b-There’s a river F nearthe house. Page 79 c-There’re trees to F the left of the house. d-There are two T gardens..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span> 3-WHILE-LISTENING / READING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise listening and reading While-listening Ask students to listen to the tape and check their prediction ( A1-page 72 ) Ask students to use the gird to talk about Hoa’s house.. While-reading Ask students to read the letter and then match.. 4-POST-LISTENING / READING ( 10 minutes ) -To check students’understand. Ask student to change the underlined information to describe their own house.. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1, 2, 3 on page 66-67 work book.. 1-Practise listening Yes. No v. Is her house big? old? v Is there a yard? v well? v Are there any flowers? v trees? v Hoa’s house is small. It isn’t big. There is a yard ……………… 2-Practise reading a-Is there a flower garden in fron of the house? b-Is the house beautiful? c-Is there a flower garden behind the house? d-Is the lake to the right of the house? e-Is Nga in the city?. A-Yes,it is. B-No, it isn’t. C-No, she isn’t. D-Yes, there is E-No, there isn’t.. Practise speaking My house There is a flower garden in front of the house. There is a vegetable garden behind the house. To the left of the house, there is a lake. To the right of the house, there are tall trees. Here is a photo. ………………………………………………. ……………………………………………….. Page 80 Planning date:November 14th 2011. Teaching date:November16th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: ………………………. UNIT 7 YOUR HOUSE Week 14 Period 41 IS YOUR HOUSE BIG? ( A3-A6 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson,students will be able to understand facilities vocabulary with “ Is there a……./ Are there any…….?” And short answers to describe the town. Vocabulary bank, supermarket, post office Structure What is this / that ? It is a / an ………. What are these / those ? They are ….. II-PREPARATION Teacher:picture for activity 3 Students:picture for activity 4 III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students to describe their house and the Ex: My house is big and beautiful. There is a sight around their house. well to the left of the house ………… 2-PRESENTATION ( 10 minutes ) -To give students the meaning of new words, hor to pronounce and new structures. Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words A bank ( n )-ngân hàng A bank ( n ) A clinic ( n )-phòng khám A clinic ( n ) A post office ( n )-bưu điện A post office ( n ) A supermarket ( n )-siêu thị A supermarket ( n ) A shop ( n )-cửa hàng A shop ( n ) A photo ( n )-bức ảnh A photo ( n ) Model sentences 2-Grammar structure Is there a yard? ---- Yes, there is. A:--What is that? ---- It is a bank. well? ---- No,there isn’t. What are those?--- They are flowers. Are there any flowers? --Yes, there are. B: --Is there a supermarket near your house? trees? --No, there aren’t. Yes, there is. C:--Is there a restaurant near your house? No, there isn’t. D:--Is there a post office near your house? Yes, there is. 3-PRACTICE ( 15 minutes ) -To help studens practise What is this / that? It is a / an……What are these / those ? They are….Is there…..? Are there……. Ask students to look at the pictures on page 74 ( A3 ). Practise speaking Picture drill ( A 3 ) -a bank: What is this ? It is a bank. Is there a bank near your house? Yes, there is. -flowers: What are those? They are flowers. Page 81 Are there any flowers in front of your house? No, there aren’t. -a post office: What is that? It is a post-office..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span> Is there a post office near your house? No, there isn’t. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………....... 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To check students’understand Ask students to look at the picture on page 74 ( A 4 ). Choose one of the house. Don’t tell your partner which house. Ask questions to find which house your partner choose.. A 5- page 75 ( Matching ) 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 4, 5, 6 on page 66-67 work book.. Speaking Are there any trees around your house? …………………………………………........ Are they to the right of your house? …………………………………………........ Are there flowers around your house? …………………………………………........ Are they in front of your house? ……………………………………................ There are some mountains behind the house. There are some trees to the right. There’s a lake to the left ) …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... Page 82 Planning date:November 19th 2011. Teaching date:November 21st 2011. Total:………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 7 YOUR HOUSE Week 15 Period 42 TOWN OR COUNTRY?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span> I-OBJECTIVE Reading a text about Ba’s and Chi’s houses to understand the differences between town and country. Vocabulary clinic, zoo, apartment, paddy field, noisy, quiet Structure Do you live …………? Does she live ……………? II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette for activity 1,3 picture for activity 1 Students:big paper to do exercise in groups III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students. a-Do you live in the city or in the country? …………………………………………....... b-Is your house big or small? ……………………………………………... c-Is your house nice ? ……………………………………………... d-What are there around your house? ……………………………………………... 2-PRE-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To give students the meaning of new words and how to pronounce. Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words Noisy ( adj )-ồn ào Noisy ( adj ) Quiet ( adj )-yên tĩnh Quiet ( adj ) An apartment ( n )-căn hộ An apartment ( n ) A market ( n )-chợ A market ( n ) A zoo ( n )-vườn thú A zoo ( n ) A paddy fields (n )-cánh đồng A paddy fields (n ) 3-WHILE-READING ( 15 minutes ) -To help students practise reading and review do you live …………? does she live ……………? . 1-Practise listening and reading Ask students to listen to the tape while ……………………………………………… reading the text.( B1 ) ……………………………………………… Ask them to read the text again and do the 2-Questions and answer exercise. a-Does Ba live in a town ? Yes, he does. b-Does he live in a house? No, he doesn’t. c-Is it noise ? Yes, it is. d-Does Chi live in town? No, she doesn’t. e-Are there any store? No, there aren’t. f-Is it quiet? Yes, it is. Ask them to read about Ba and Chi again 3-Writing and then write sentences about Chi. ( B2 ) -Chi lives in a house in the country. -Near her house, there aren’t any stores. Page 83 -Near house there are trees, flowers. -Near her house there is a river and a lake …………… 4-POST-READING ( 10 minutes ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span> -To check students’understand. Ask students to listen and complete the table ( B3-page 77 ). Listen and complete the table name city Minh Tuan Nga. Ask students to look at the table and speak.. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1, 2 on page 68 work book. Exercise 1: Use there is / there isn’t ….. there are / there aren’t ….. to complete these sentences. Exercise 2: Read the text about Chi and Ba in the student’s book. Then answer the questions.. v. town cou ntry x x. apart house ment x. v. Ex: Minh lives in an apartment in the city. Tuan lives in a house in the country. ……………………………………………… ………………………………………………. ……………………………………………... …………………………………………....... …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... Page 84 Planning date:November 20th 2011. Teaching date:November 22nd 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 7 YOUR HOUSE Week 15 Period 43 ON THE MOVE ( C1, C3 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson,students will be able to talk about transportation by using the simple present “ how-question and by car, plane, train…” Vocabulary bike, bus, motorbike, car, plane, train, to trvel, to walk Structure How does your father go to work ? He goes to work by car. II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette and pictures for activity 1,3 Students: pictures for activity 2 III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To lead students into new lesson Speaking Guessing game: Ask students to choose a S1: Are you going to the post office? place in town ( factory, museum, post office S2: No, I am not. ……) and complete the sentence strip. S1: Where are you going? I am gong to the I am going to the ……………………….. museum. ……………………………………………… 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, the form to ask and answer about transportation. Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words A car ( n )-ô tô A car ( n ) A bike ( n )-xe đạp A bike ( n ) A motorbike ( n )-xe máy A motorbike ( n ) A bus ( n )-xe buýt A bus ( n ) A plane ( n )-máy bay A plane ( n ) to travel ( v )-đi lại, di chuyển to travel ( v ) to walk ( v )- đi bộ to walk ( v ) Model sentences 2-Grammar structure How do you / they go / travel to work? I / they go / travel to work by bus. How does he / she travel to school? He / she travels to school by bike. How do / does + subject + travel / go .. to ..? Subject + travel ( s ) / go ( es ) …. by + mean of transport. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise the form to ask and answer about transportation. Ask students to look at the five pictures on 1-Practise speaking page 78 . Ask and answer each other ( C1) Picture 1 Lien –bike How does Lien go to school? She goes to school by bike. Picture 2 Thu-motorbike How does Thu go to school? Page 85 She goes there by motorbike. Picture 3 Tuan-bus How does Tuan travel to school? He travels to school by bus..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span> ( C3 page 80: Listening ) Ask students listen to the tape and fill in the table.. Picture 4 Hoa-car How does Hoa get to school? She gets to school by car. 2-Practise listening Name. Ba. Lan. Nam. Nga. Tuan. Mrs Huong. Mr. Ha. Miss. Chi. Trans po rtat ion. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students write about themselves Write it up Ask students to write five sentences about transportation which their family members use to go to work everyday.. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1-2 on page 70-71 workbook Exercise1: Complete the sentence with the correct form of the verbs Exercise 2: Look at the pictures. Ask and answer.. Writing Ex: Every day my father goes to work by motor. My mother travels to work by bus. My sister and I go to school by bike. ……………………………………………… ………………………………………………. Ex: These people travel to work by bus. How does Mr.Ba go to work? He walks to work.. Page 86 st. Planning date:November 21 2011. Teaching date:November 23rd 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 7 YOUR HOUSE Week 15 Period 44 ON THE MOVE ( C4-C6 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about one’s daily routine by reading a text about Hoang’s daily routine. Vocabulary take a shower, leave the house, start, end, half past, a quarter Structure what time do you / does she get up? I get up / she gets up at ……… I leave / she leaves the house. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette for activity 3, 4 Students:big paper to do exercise in groups. III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Ask students to look at the pictures on page 78-79. Ask and answer about transportation.. 2-PRE-READING ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, help them predict the content of the text. Pre-teach vocabulary take a shower ( v )-tắm leave the house ( v )-ra khỏi nhà start ( v )-bắt đầu end ( v )-kết thúc half past = thirty past a quarter to / past = fifteen to / past Open prediction Ask students to predict what time Hoang does the following things.. 3-WHILE-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise reading, answering questions about Hoang. Ask students to listen to the text while reading. Ask them to read the text again and check. CONTENT Speaking Picture 1: How does Lien go to school? She goes to shool by bike. Picture 2: How do Thu and her sister go to shool? They goes by bike. ……………………………………………… ………………………………………………. 1-New words take a shower ( v ) leave the house ( v ) start ( v ) end ( v ) half past = thirty past a quarter to / past = fifteen to / past 2-Prediction What time …..? He gets up ……….. He leaves the house …………………… School starts ……... School ends ……… He has lunch ……... 1-Practise listening and reading ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… Page 87. their prediction then answer the questions Comprehension question. 2-Question and answer a-What time does Hoang get up? He gets up at half past five..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span> b-What time does he go to school? He goes to school at half past six. c-Does he go to school by car? No, he doesn’t. d-Does he walk to school? Yes, he does. e-What time do classes start? Classes start at seven. f-What time do they end? They end at half past eleven. 4-POST-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students talk about themselves. Survey. Speaking What time ……………...? Name …… Name ……. get up go to school classes start classes end go home have lunch. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 3-4 on page 71 work book. Exercise 3: Complete the passage with the correct form of the verbs. Exercise 4: Answer questions about you.. Ex:What time do you get up? I get up at six o’clock.. She teaches at a small school in the village. Do you have school in the morning? Yes, I do / No, I don’t. Page 88 Planning date:November 26th 2011. Teaching date:November 28th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 8 OUT AND ABOUT Week 16 Period 45 WHAT ARE YOU DOING? ( A1-A3 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about actions happening now. Vocabulary to ride, to drive, to wait for Structure What are you doing? I am reading a book. What is she doing? She is watching TV. II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette and pictures for activity 1 Students: pictures for activity 1 III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson. Speaking Ask students to talk about the transportations My father goes to work by ……………........ which their family members use to go to My mother travels to work by ……………... work everyday. My sister gets to …………………………… My brother come ……………………........... I ……………………………………………. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, the form to talk about actions happening now. Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words To play video ( v )-chơi điện tử To play video ( v ) To ride a bike ( v )-đi xe đạp To ride a bike ( v ) To drive ( v )-lái xe To drive ( v ) To wait for ( v )-đợi To wait for ( v ) To walk ( v )-đi bộ To walk ( v ) Presentation text Model sentences 2-Grammar structure The present continuous tense Affirmative:Subject + be + verb-ing …… I am v-ing ……… She / he is v-ing ……… I am watching TV. We / you / they are v-ing ……… He is listening to the radio. Ex: I am playing video games. They are reading. He is watching TV. Ex: What are you doing now? They are listening to music. I am reading a book. Question with WH What is she doing ? What is he / she + v-ing ……………? She is doing her homework. What are we / you / they + v-ing ......? What are they doing? They are waiting for a train. How to use: we use this form to express actions happening now 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise expressing actions happening now. Page 89 Ask stusents to look at the six pictures on Practise speaking page 83 ask and answer each other. ( A 3) Picture1: What is he doing? He is playing video games. Picture 2:What is she doing?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span> She is riding her bike. Picture 3: What is he doing? He is driving a car. Picture 4: What are they doing? They are waiting for a bus. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help studenst write about themselves. Ask students to write five sentences about actions which their family members or their friends are doing now.. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1,on page 72-73 workbook. Exercise 1: Complete the sentences. Using am / is / are + one of these verbs.. Practise writing Ex: It is ten o’clock. My father is reading a book. My mother is cooking .…………………….. My brother is ………………………………. My sister …………………………………… My grandparents are ………………………. I …………………………………………….. Ex: Listen! Ba is playing the piano.. Page 90 th. Planning date:November 27 2011. Teaching date:November 29th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 8 OUT AND ABOUT Week 16 Period 46 WHAT ARE YOU DOING? ( A4-A6 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span> I-OBJECTIVE Listening and reading for specific information and by the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about actions happening now. Vocabulary a businnessman, by plane, by car, by train Structure Where is she going? How is she traveling? She is going to Ha Noi. She is traveling by plane. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette and pictures for activity 4 Students: pictures for activity 1. III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Ask students to look at the six pictures on page 82 in a minute and then ask them to describe each picture. 2-PRE-LISTENING / READING ( 10 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to read new words, describe each picture before listening. Pre-listening Ask students to look at the six pictures on page 84 and then describe each of them. Ex: Picture a: He is riding a bike.. Pre-reading Pre-teach vacabulary a businessman ( n )-thương gia by plane – bằng máy bay Model sentences The present continuous tense. CONTENT Speaking Picture 1-The boy is playing video games. Picture 2-The girl is riding her bike. Picture 3-The boy is driving a car. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... 1-Describe the pictures Picture b: He is driving a car. Picture c: She is walking. Picture d: They are going to school by motor. Picture e: He is wating for a bus. Picture f: She is wating for her train at the station. 2-New words a businnessman ( n ) by plane 3-Grammar structure Who is walking to school? Miss.Lien is walking to school. Where are Mai and Lan going? They are going to school. How is Tuan traveling to school? He is traveling by his bike.. 3-WHILE-LISTENING / READING ( 15 minutes ) -To help students practise listening and reading While-listening Page 91 Ask students to look at the six pictures on page 84, listen and number the picture as they hear.. 1-Practise listening Picture Picture a. Number 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span> While-reading Ask students to listen to the tape while reading ( A6 –page 85 ) Ask them to read the text again and the answer questions. 4-POST-LISTENING / READING ( 10 minutes ) -To check students’ understand. Post-listening Ask students to look at the six picture on page 84. Ask them. Post-reading Ask students to write some sentences to express what they are doing.. Picture b 1 Picture c 5 Picture d 3 Picture e 6 Picture f 2 2-Practise reading Picture a a-Who is this / that? This / that is Mr. Ha. b-What does he do? He is a businessman. c-Where is he going? He is going to Ha Noi. d-How is he traveling? He is traveling by plane.. 1-Question and answer a-What is the boy in picture e doing? …………………………………………... b-Where is the girl in picture c walking? …………………………………………... c-What is the man in picture b doing? …………………………………………... 2-Write it up Ex: I am listening to you. My friend-Tuan is writing. Lan and Mai are reading.. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 2 on page 72-73 workbook. Exercise 2: What is different between picture Ex: In picture A the boy is standing. In A and B? Write two sentences each time. picture B the girl is sitting on a chair. Use is / are + V-ing. ………………………………………………. Page 92 th. Planning date:November 28 2011. Teaching date:November 30th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 8 OUT AND ABOUT Week 16 Period 47 A TRUCK DRIVER ( B1 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span> I-OBJECTIVE Reading a picture story about a truck driver to understand the main ideas and details. Vocabulary a truck, a food stall, to load, to unload, to take … to Structure It is 5.00 o’clock in the morning. Mr.Quang is going to a farm. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette and picture for activity 1 Students:picture for activity 1 III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students to describe the six pictures on Ex: Picture a page 84 students’ books. He is riding his bike to school. ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… 2-PRE-READING ( 15 minutes ) -To give the meaning and how to pronounce new words, help students predict the content of the text. Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words A truck driver ( n )-người lái xe tải A truck driver ( n ) A farmer ( n )-nông dân A farmer ( n ) To load ( v )-chất hàng lên To load ( v ) To unload ( v )-dỡ hàng xuống To unload ( v ) A food stall ( n )-quầy bán thực phẩm A food stall ( n ) To drive at ( v )-đến To drive at ( v ) The present continuous for an action It is 5.00 o’clock in the morning. Mr.Quang happening at the moment of speaking. is going to a farm Ordering statements 2-Ordering statements 1.going to Ha Noi I think I read 2.meeting the farmer a meeting the farmer 3.having breakfast b 4.going to a farm c 5.loading vegetables in the truck d 6.unloading the truck e f 3-WHILE-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise reading and answering questions. Ask students to listen to the tape while 1-Practise listening and reading reading. ……………………………………………… Ask them to read the story again and fill in a-4 b-2 c-5 d-1 e-6 f-3 the “I read “ column. Comprehension questions 2-Question and answer Ask students to read the story once more and then answer the questions. Page 93 a-What does Mr.Quang do? He is a truck driver. b-Where is he going at five in the morning? He is going to a farm.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span> c-Who is waiting for him? A farmer is waiting for him. d-Where is he taking the vegetables? He is taking the vegetables to the market. e-What is he doing at seven o’clock? He is eating his breakfast. Where is he eating? He is eating at a foodstall. 4-POST-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise by themselves Ask students to summarize the content of the Summarize the content of the text story. Mr.Quang is a driver. Now he is driving his truck to a farm. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 3 on page 74 workbook. Exercise 3: Put the verbs in brackets into the …………………………………………... simple present or the present progressive. ………………………………………….... Page 94 Planning date:December 3rd 2011. Teaching date:December 5th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 8 OUT AND ABOUT Week 17 Period 48 A TRUCK DRIVER ( B2-B3 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to to talk about actions happening now ( use the present continuous tense with yes / no question ). Vocabulary to copy, to correct, to say, a fly, a spider, to make a web Structure Are you working? Yes, I am. Is she listening to the radio? No, she isn’t. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette for activity 2 Students:the poem on page 88 on a paper III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students to read story about Mr.Quang a-Where is he going at five in the morning? and the and answer questions. ……………………………………………… b-What is he doing at seven o’clock? …………………………………………....... 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, the present continuous tense with yes / no question. Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words to copy ( v )- sao, chép to copy ( v ) to correct ( v )-sửa, chữa to correct ( v ) to say ( v )- nói to say ( v ) a fly ( n )-con ruồi a fly ( n ) a spider ( n )-con nhện a spider ( n ) to make a web ( v )- dệt vải to make a web ( v ) The present continuous tense 2-Grammar structure Interrogative Is / are + subject + verb-ing …..? Yes + subject + am / is / are. No + subject + ( am / is / are ) + not. Ex: Are you reading a book? Yes, I am. Is she doing her homework? No, she isn’t. Are they playing soccer? Yes, they are. We use the progressive to describe actions or events which are in progressive at the moment of speaking. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise interrogative of the present continuous tense. Ask students to listen to the tape while 1-Practise listening and reading Page 95 reading ( B2 page 87 ) ……………………………………………… Ask students to read the dialogue in groups Students read the dialogue in groups. and then answer questions. Comprehension question 2-Question and answer.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span> a-What is Ba doing? He is doing his homework. b-Is he doing his math? Yes, he is. c-Is he copying Nam’s work? No,he isn’t. d-What is Tuan doing? He is playing soccer. e-Are Nga and Huong working? No, they aren’t. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise by themselves Write positive and negative short answers ( Yes, I am / No, I’m not ). Practise speaking and writing a-Are you listening to music? ……………………………………………… b-Are you eating an ice cream? ……………………………………………… c-Is your father working? ……………………………………………… d-Is Hoa doing math? ……………………………………………… e-Are Ba and Nam copying Hoa’s work? ……………………………………………… f-Is your teacher standing near you? ………………………………………………. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 3 on page 74 workbook. Exercise 3: Put the verbs in brackets into the ……………………………………………… simple present or the present progressive. …………………………………………......... Page 96 Planning date:December 4th 2011. Teaching date:December 6th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 8 OUT AND ABOUT Week 17 Period 49 ROAD SIGNS ( C1-C2 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span> I-OBJECTIVE Can / can’t statements and traffic vocabulary to talk about what you are allowed and not allowed to do on the road. Vocabulary one way, turn left / right park go ahead, road sign Structure You can turn left / you can not turn right. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette and pictures of road sign Students:pictures of road sign III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Write five sentences telling what you and -I am listening to the teacher. your friends are doing now. -Lan is talking to Ba. -Mai and Tuan are writing. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words and the form with can / can’t. Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words A policeman ( n )-cảnh sát A policeman ( n ) A sign ( n )-biển báo A sign ( n ) One-way ( n )-đường một chiều One-way ( n ) Difficult ( adj )-khó khăn Difficult ( adj ) To park ( v )-dừng , đỗ xe To park ( v ) To turn left / right ( v )-rẽ trái, phải To turn left / right ( v ) To go straight ( v )-đi thẳng To go straight ( v ) Model sentences 2-Grammar structure Can / can’t for ability You can park here. You can’t go in that street. Can you swim ? Yes, I can / No, I can’t. Affirmative Subject + can + bare-infinitive ………….. Negative Subject + can not / can’t + bare-infinitive. Interrogative Can + subject + V ( without to ) ………..? Yes, + S + can / No, + S + can’t Notice: can for all persons can not = can’t 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise using can / can’ Ask students to listen to the tape while 1-Practise listening and reading reading. ……………………………………………… Ask them to read the text again and then ……………………………………………… look at the pictures and answer the questions Page 97 Picture drill 2-Question and answer What does this sign mean? You can park here. What does that sign mean?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span> You can’t turn left. What about this sign? You can turn right. What about this sign? You can’t ride a motorbike. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise writing sentences with can or can’t. Write it up ( C2 page 89-90 ) Ask students to look at the pictures of road sighs on page 89-90 and write. Ask students to write five sentences about their abilities.. Practise writing a-You can turn left. b-You can’t turn right. c-You can go ahead. d-You can’t ride a motorbike. -I can cook. -He can swim. -She can ride a bike. -They can’t ride motors.. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1 on page 75 workbook. Exercise 1: Tell your partner if he or she can …………………………………………....... …………………………………………....... do these things.. Page 98 Planning date:December 5th 2011. Teaching date:December7th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 8 OUT AND ABOUT Week 17 Period 50 ROAD SIGNS ( C3-C4 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span> I-OBJECTIVE Reading a text about the road signs to understand must and mustn’t for obligation / prohibition. Vocabulary must / mustn’t, turn left / right, dangerous, accident, warn, intersection Structure What must we do ? We must slow down. We mustn’t go straight ahead. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette and pictures for activity 3 Students:pictures for activity 4. III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Ask students to look at the pictures of road sign. Listen and answer questions. 2-PRE-READING ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words and the form with must / mustn’t Pre-teach vocabulary An intersection ( n )-giao lộ To slow down ( v )-giảm tốc To go fast ( v )-đi nhanh, tăng tốc To warn us ( v )-nhắc nhở, cảnh báo To help us ( v )-giúp đỡ Model sentence. True-False prediction Ask students to look at the pictures in C 4 page 91 and choose the correct statement for each one.. CONTENT Speaking Ex: What does this sign mean? You can’t park here. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... 1-New words An intersection ( n ) To slow down ( v ) To go fast ( v ) To warn us ( v ) To help us ( v ) 2-Grammar structure Subject + must / mustn’t + bare-infinitive We must have discipline. We must not go straight ahead. 3-True / false statement a-Slow down Go straight. b-Turn left c-Turn Don’t turn right left Go straight or turn left. e-Park here f-Cars and Don’t park truck go here here Motors go here. 3-WHILE-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise reading Ask students to listen to the text while reading.. d-Slow down Don’t go straight ahead g-Don’t h-Park go straight here Don’t turn Don’t park right or left here. 1-Practise listening and reading Page 99. Ask them to read the text again and check their prediction.. 2-Check the prediction a-Slow down v Go straight. b-Turn left v c-Turn right d-Slow Don’t turn Go straight down left or turn left Don’t go v straight.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span> e-Park here Don’t park here v. 4-POST-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise by themselves C 4- page 91: Ask students to listen to the tape and number the sign.. Picture drill: C 4 page 91.. f-Cars and truck go here v Motors go here. g-Don’t go straight Don’t turn right or left v. ahead v h-Park here v Don’t park here. 1-Practise listening a-Slow down b-Turn left c-Go straight or turn left d-Don’t go straight ahead e-Don’t park here f-Cars and truck go here g-Don’t turn right or left h-Park here 2-Practise speaking What does the sign in picture a mean? You must slow down. What does the sign in picture b mean? You must turn left. You mustn’t turn right. ………………………………………………. ……………………………………………….. 5-HOME-WORK At home do exercise 2 on page 7 workbook. Exercise 2: Complete the following Ex:The lights are red. You must stop. sentences. Use can / can’t, must / mustn’t + ………………………………………………. verb.. Page 100 Planning date:December 10th 2011. Teaching date:December12th 2011. Total:………. Absentees: …………………… Week 18 Period 51 GRAMMAR PRACTICE I-OBJECTIVE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span> Further practice in simple present and present progressive, prepositions of place, question words, can / can’t and must / mustn’t Vocabulary all words in unit 7, 8 ( revision ) Structure the simple present and the present continuous tense II-PREPARATION Teacher: form of the simple present and present progressive on a big paper Students: do all exercises at home III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students to give the form of the present …………………………………………........ simple and present progressive. …………………………………………........ 2-PRESENTATION ( 10 minute ) -To help students remember the presents continuous and the present simple tense. The present continuous tense Grammar structure Affirmative: Subject + be + verb-ing …... Question with WH I am v-ing ……... What is he / she + v-ing …...? She / he is v-ing …….. What are we / you / they + v-ing …...? We / you / they are v-ing …….. How to use: How to use: we use this form to Negative: Subject + be + not + v-ing …... express actions happening now. I am not v-ing …….. The present simple She / he is not v-ing ……. Affirmative: Subject + V ( s / es ) + …... We / you / they are not v-ing …… s / es for she / he / it …….. Interrogative: Is / are + subject + v-ing ….? Negative: Is + he / she + v-ing….? Subject + don’t / doesn’t + V +………… Yes + he / she + is. don’t for I / we /you / they…………….... No + he / she + isn’t. doesn’t for she / he / it …………………. Are + you / they + v-ing…..? Interrogative: Do / does + subject + V...? Yes + I am, we / they are. Yes + subject + do / does. No + I am not, we / they aren’t. No + subject don’t /doesn’t. don’t for I / we /you / they…. doesn’t for she / he / it …….. How to use:to express habitual actions that happen repeatedly. 3-PRACTICE ( 20 minutes ) -To help students practise using the present Practise speaking continuous and present simple tense. Grammar practice 1 Grammar practice 1 ( present simple ) a-How do you go to school? I go to school by bus. b-How does he travel to Ha Noi? He travels by plane. c-Do you walk to school? No, I don’t walk to school. Does she walk to school? Yes, she walks to Page 101 school. Grammar practice 2 ( present continuous Grammar practice 2 tense ) a-Minh is riding his bike. b-They are waiting for a bus..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span> Grammar practice 3 ( preposition ). Grammar practice 4 ( question words ). Grammar practice 5 ( must / mustn’t ). Grammar practice 6 ( can / can’t ). 4-PRODUCTION ( 5 minutes ) -To help students distinguish the two tenses Contrast: present simple and present progressive tenses.. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home review the form and how to use the present simple and present progressive.. c-She is watching TV. d-We are playing soccer. e-He is listening to music. f-They are walking to school. g-He is travelling to Ha Noi. Grammar practice 3 Look at the store. A girl is in the store. A boy is waiting in front of the store. There are mountains behind the store and some houses opposite it. There are some trees to the right of the store. There ia a truck to the left of the store. Grammar practice 4 a-Where is Lan going? She is going to the store. b-Who is waiting for Lan?Nga is waiting for Lan. c-What is Lan carrying ? She is carrying a bag. d-What time is it ? It is twelve o’clock. Grammar practice 5 a-At an intersection, you must slow down.You mustn’t go fast. b-Here you must turn left. You mustn’t turn right. You mustn’t go straight on. c-Here you must stop. You mustn’t go straight on. Grammar practice 6 a-You can’t park. b-You can park. c-You can’t ride a motor here. Present simple and present progressive tenses a-She rides her bike to school. She is riding her bike now. b-We go to school everyday. We are going to school now. c-I walk to school everyday. I am walking to school now. d-He drives his truck. He is driving his truck at the moment. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... Page 102 Planning date:December 11 th 2011. Teaching date:December 13 th 2011. Total:……… Absentees: …………………… Week 18 Period 52 CONSOLIDATION I-OBJECTIVE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span> By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use perfectly the present simple to talk about habitual actions that happen repeatedly. Vocabulary all words from unit 1 to unit 8 ( revision ) Structure the simple present tense ( revision ) II-PREPARATION Teacher: form of the simple present on a big paper Students: review this tenses carefully at home III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students to give the form of the simple ........................................................................ present. ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… 2-PRESENTATION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students remember the form and Grammar structure how to use of the present simple tense. The present simple Revision Affirmative The present simple tense. Subject + V ( s / es ) + …………………. Negative Subject + don’t / doesn’t + V + ............... Interrogative Do / does + subject + V…………………? Yes + subject + do / does. No + subject don’t / doesn’t. How to use: To express habitual actions that happen repeatedly. Notice: verbs ending in ss, sh, ch, x and o add es to form the third person. Ex: I watch ---- she watches… They wash---- my mother washes… We miss----- she misses… I go -----he goes… when y follows a consonant we change the y into i and add es. Ex: I carry ------ she carries.. We try---- she tries… But verbs ending in y following a vowel obay the usual rule. I say--------he says….. This form is often used with adverb of frequency, every week / month, on Mondays, twice a year …. or time clauses expressing routine or habitual actions ( whenever and when ) 3-PRACTICE ( 15 minutes ) Page 103 -To help students practise using the present simple tense. Put the verbs in the brackets into the present Practise speaking simple tense.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span> -He ( wish ) ………. to speak to you. -Bus ( pass ) ……. my house every hour. -Mai ( help ) ………. her father. -We ( change ) ……… planes at Heathrow. -Mai and Lan ( watch ) ….... to much TV. -She ( worry ) ……… too much. -They ( wash ) …….. the floor every week. -His sons ( go ) …… to the local school. -My sister sometimes ( miss ) …… the bus. -He ( saty ) ……. at home on Sundays. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students further practise. Ask students to change these sentences into negative and interrogative. -He wishes to speak to you. -Bus passes my house every hour. -Mai helps her father. -We change planes at Heathrow. -Mai and Lan watch to much TV. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home review the present progressive.. -He ( wish ) wishes to speak to you. -Bus ( pass ) passes my house every hour. -Mai ( help ) helps her father. -We ( change ) change planes at Heathrow. -Mai and Lan ( watch ) watch to much TV. -She ( worry ) worries too much. -They ( wash ) wash the floor every week. -His sons ( go ) go to the local school. -My sister sometimes ( miss ) misses the bus. -He ( saty ) stays at home on Sundays.. Practise writing -Does he wish to speak to you? He doesn’t wish to speak to you. -Does bus pass your house every hour? Bus doesn’t pass my house every hour. -Does Mai help her father? Mai doesn’t help her father. -Do you change planes at Heathrow? We don’t change planes at Heathrow. -Do Mai and Lan watch too much TV? Mai and Lan don’t watch too much TV. ……………………………………………… ………………………………………………. Page 104 Planning date:December 12 th 2011. Teaching date:December 14 th 2011. Total: ……… Absentees: ……………………. Week 18 Period 53 CONSOLIDATION I-OBJECTIVE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span> By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use perfectly the present progressive to talk about an action happening now. Vocabulary all words from unit 1 to unit 8 ( revision ) Structure the present continuous tense ( revision ) II-PREPARATION Teacher: form of the present progressive on a big paper Students: review this tense carefully at home III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students to give the form of the …………………………………………........ present progressive tense. …………………………………………....... …………………………………………........ 2-PRESENTATION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students remember the form and Grammar structure how to use this tense. The present continuous tense Affirmative: Subject + be + verb-ing…... I am v-ing……... She / he is v-ing…….. We / you / they are v-ing…….. Negative: Subject + be + not + v-ing …... I am not v-ing…….. She / he is not v-ing……. We / you / they are not v-ing…… Interrogative: Is / are + subject + v-ing.? Is + he / she + v-ing? Yes + he / she + is. No + he / she + isn’t. Are + you / they + v-ing.? Yes + I am, we / they are. No + I am not, we / they aren’t. -when a verb ends in a single e, this e is dropped before ing except after age, dye, singe or verbs ending in ee. -when verb of one syllable has one vowel and ends in a single consonant, this consonant is doubled before ing. Hit--hitting, stop--stopping, run—running We use this tense for an action happening now. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise using the present progressive tense Put the verbs in brackets into the present Practise speaking progressive tense. Page 105 -She ( not work ) ………….., she ( swim ) -She ( not work ) isn’t working, she ( swim ) ………….. in the river. is swimming in the river. -He ( teach ) ……………. his boy to ride. -He ( teach ) is teaching his boy to ride. -What ……. Tom ( do ) ………… now? He -What is Tom ( do ) doing now? He.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span> ( clean ) …………. his shoes. -What …… you ( read ) ………..now? I ( read ) ………. Crime and Punishment. -…….. it ( rain ) ………..? Yes, it ( rain ) …………… very hard. You can’t go out. 4-PRODUCTION ( 15 minutes ) -To help students distinguish the present progressive and simple present tense. Put the verb in each bracket into the correct form: simple present or present continuous tense. a-My brother ( do ) ……….. his homework in his room now. He ( do ) ….. it every day. b-James and his brother ( play ) ….. soccer now. They ( play ) …… it every afternoon after school. c-You can use my pen. I ( use ) …….. it everyday but now I ( not use ) ………… it.. ( clean ) is cleaning his shoes. -What are you ( read ) reading now? I ( read ) am reading Crime and Punishment. -Is it ( rain ) raining ? Yes, it ( rain ) is raining very hard. You can’t go out.. Practise using the form of the verbs. a-My brother (do) is doing his homework in his room now.He (do) does it everyday. b-James and his brother ( play ) are playing soccer now. They ( play ) play it every afternoon after school. c-You can use my pen. I ( use ) use it everyday but now I ( not use ) am not using it. d-Where is the old man living now? d-Where is the old man living now? He ( live ) ……… with his son. He usually He ( live ) is living with his son. He usually ( live ) ……… with him on holiday. ( live ) lives with him on holiday. e-Mr.Smith often ( teach ) ……. class 6A, but e-Mr.Smith often ( teach ) teaches class 6A, this morning he ( teach ) …… class 6B. but this morning he ( teach ) is teaching class 6B. f-Trang usually ( listen) ….. to the teacher in f-Trang usually ( listen ) listen to the teacher the class, but she ( not listen ) …... now; She in the class, but she ( not listen ) isn’t ( look ) …………. out of the window. listening now; She ( look ) is looking out of the window. g-Where is your father? He ( be ) ……….. g-Where is your father? in the bathroom.He ( brush ) …………. his He ( be ) is in the bathroom.He ( brush ) is teeth. He ( brush ) ………… his teeth in the brushing his teeth. He ( brush ) brushes his morning and evening. teeth in the morning and evening. h-Your children ( go ) ……… to school by h-Are your children ( go ) going to school by bus today? bus today? i-There ( be )…..many flowers in out garden i-There ( be ) are many flowers in out garden. j-Everyday Mr.Hung ( not drive ) …….. to j-Everyday Mr.Hung ( not drive ) doesn’t work. He ( travel ) ………….. by taxi. drive to work. He ( travel ) travels by taxi. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home review words and structures you …………………………………………….... learnt from unit 1 to unit 8.You are going to ……………………………………………… have the first term test next week. ……………………………………………..... Page 106 Phòng giáo dục và đào tạo thành phố Yên Bái Trường THCS Văn Tiến Ngày 16 tháng 12 năm 2011 Week 18 Period 54 Kiểm tra học kì I.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span> I-Chọn từ có phần gạch chân phát âm khác so với những từ còn lại. ( 1 đ ) 1. A-telephone B-post office C-close D-mother 2. A-pens B-books C-pencils D-rulers 3. A-time B-big C-live D-sit 4. A-house B-desk C-eraser D-student II-Đọc đoạn văn sau và trả lời câu hỏi. ( 2,5 đ ) My name is Ba. I am twelve years old. I live in a house in the city. Near my house there is a bank, a clinic and a supermarket, so it is very noisy. Every day I get up at 5.30. I have breakfast at 6 o’clock. I go to school at 6.45. My school is near my house, so I walk to school. My classes start at 7 o’clock and finish at a quarter to twelve. To day we have English, maths, literature and history. I love all of them. 1-Where does Ba live? 2-Is there a bank, a clinic and a market near his house? 3-What time does he have breakfast? 4-How does he go to school? 5-Does he like English? III-Chọn đáp án thích hợp trong số A, B, C, D để hoàn thành các câu sau. ( 1,5 đ ) 1-Does Lan watch TV after doing her homework? Yes, ………………. A-she watches B-she does. C-she is D-it does 2-I go to shool at ………… A-quarter past six B-a quarter six C-a quarter past six D-the quarter past six 3-There is a restaurant and a movie theater ………… my house. A-near B-between C-in D-next 4-………. do you have English? I have it on Monday, Thursday and Friday. A-What B-What time C-Which D-When 5-What time ……. Hoang go to bed? A-do B-does C-is D-are 6-He has ……. big breakfast and then he goes to school. A-a B-an C-the D-some IV-Chia động từ trong các câu sau đây. ( 1,5 đ ) 1-Minh ( do ) ……. his homework in the evening. He ( do ) ………… his homework now. 2-Our school ( have ) …….. a small garden. There ( be ) …… many flowers in it. 3-What the students ( do ) after school? They ( play ) …….. sports. V-Viết lại các câu sau theo chỉ dẫn trong ngoặc. ( 2 ) 1-There are some flowers in the garden. ( Đổi sang câu hỏi nghi vấn ) 2-Nam rides his bike to school everyday. ( Viết lại câu nghĩa không đổi dùng by ) 3-The garden is to the left of Nga’s house. ( Viết lại câu nghĩa không đổi dùng right ) 4-My class starts at 7.30. ( Đặt câu hỏi dùng what time …… ) VI-Viết một đoạn văn ngắn khoảng 30-40 từ miêu tả nhà em dựa vào ác câu hỏi gợi ý sau. -Where do you live? -Is it big or small? -What is there / are there to the left / right / in front of / behind your house?. Page 107 th. Planning date: December 24 2011. Teaching date: December 26th 2011. Total: ……….. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 9 THE BODY Week 20 Period 55 PART OF THE BODY ( A1-A2 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about parts of the body. Vocabulary head, shoulder, arm ………………. Structure What is this? This is his head. What are those? Those are his shoulders. II-PREPARATION Teacher: photo of a man or woman Students: big papers III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson. Speaking Ask students to use these words to introduce This is Mai. Mai. She is a student. Mai / a student / 12 years old / grade 6 / class She is 12 years old. 6A She is in grade 6- class 6A. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words. Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words Head ( n )-đầu Head ( n ) Arm ( n )-cánh tay Arm ( n ) Chest ( n )-ngực Chest ( n ) Leg ( n )-ống chân Leg ( n ) Toe ( n )-ngón chân Toe ( n ) Foot ( n )-bàn chân Foot ( n ) Hand ( n )-cánh tay Hand ( n ) Shoulder ( n )-vai Shoulder ( n ) What is that? That is his head. What are those? They are his shoulders. Singular noun + s /es = plural noun 2-Grammar structure Ex: a shoulder ------ two shoulders. a watch ------ three watches Notice: Nouns ending in o, ch, sh, ss, x form their plural by adding es 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise words for parts of the body. Ask students to listen to the tape while 1-Practise listening and reading reading new words. ……………………………………………… Ask students to play the game Simon says. 2-Practise speaking Simon says touch your head- Students touch their head. Ask students to come to the board. Look at Page 108 the picture and put the words into the right armarm parts of the body. chest chest …… …….

<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span> head. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students remember the words for parts of the body. Ask students to look at the picture of a man or woman. Show each part of his or her body Practise speaking and writing and ask students. Ex: Show his head and ask. What is this ? - - - It is his head. S1: What is this ? What is that ? ----It is her chest. S2: It is his arm. S3: What is that ? S4: It is his leg. ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1, 2 on page 83 workbook. Exercise 1: Look at the picture. Write the …………………………………………........ name of each part of the body in the box. …………………………………………........ Exercise 2: Read. Then continue the list of …………………………………………........ parts of the body.. Page 109 Planning date:December 25th 2011. Teaching date:December 27th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 9 THE BODY Week 20 Period 56 PART OF THE BODY ( A3-A4 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe physical appearance. Vocabulary tall, short, thin, fat ……… Structure He is tall. She is thin. II-PREPARATION Teacher:picture for activity 3, 4 Students:big papers to do exercise in groups III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson speaking Ask students to look at the picture of a man …………………………………………........ and then put the word into the right part of …………………………………………........ his body. …………………………………………........ 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words. Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words Tall ( adj )-cao Tall ( adj ) Short ( adj )-thấp, ngắn Short ( adj ) Thin ( adj )-gầy Thin ( adj ) Fat ( adj )-béo Fat ( adj ) Heavy ( adj )-nặng Heavy ( adj ) Light ( adj )-nhẹ Light ( adj ) Strong ( adj )-khỏe Strong ( adj ) Weak ( adj )-yếu Weak ( adj ) Model sentence 2-Grammar structure She is tall. He is short. She is tall. He is short. They are fat. We are heavy. They are fat. We are heavy. Subject + am / is / are + complement. I am tall and thin. (adjs for physical appearance) Mai is light. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students predict what they are going to hear. T / F Repeatition Drill ( A4 ) 1-Speaking Teacher Students Picture a: She’s thin. She’s tall. repeat repeat b He’s thin. He’s short. He’s fat. silent repeat repeat c He’s small. He’s tall. He’s heavy. ……. …… …….. d She’s fat. She’s heavy. She’s light. Page 110 ……. …… ………. Ask students to fill in the adjectives for the 2-Grid people in the pictures a-d Tall ? short ? thin ? Listen Students then listen and write the order a 4.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span> ( 1, 2, 3, 4 ) of the people described.. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise writing sentences to describe physical appearance. Ask students to look at the pictures on page 98 and write sentences. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 3, 4 on page 84 workbook. Exercise 3:Look at the picture and say what each person looks like.Then write the sentences in your exercise book. Exercise 4: Check true sentences.. b c d. 3 2 1. Practise writing Ex: She is thin and light. He is very fat and short. He is heavy. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... Page 111 th. Planning date:December 26 2011. Teaching date:December 28th 2011. Total: ………. Absentees: ………………….. UNIT 9 THE BODY Week 20 Period 57 PART OF THE BODY ( A5-A6 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span> I-OBJECTIVE Reading a text about Chi and Tuan, and by the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe someone. Vocabulary A gymnast, a weightlift, a dentist …… Structure Who is this ? This is Chi. What does she do? She is a gymnast. II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette, pictures for activity 5 Students: read the text at home III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students to look at the four pictures on ........................................................................ page 98 Tien Anh 6. Describe the people in …………………………………………........ the picture. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ 2-PRE-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words A gymnast ( n )-vận động viên thể dục dụng A gymnast ( n ) cụ A weightlift ( n )-vận động viên cử tạ A weightlift ( n ) A dentist ( n )-nha sĩ A dentist ( n ) An architect ( n )-kiến trúc sư An architect ( n ) A shopkeeper ( n )-chủ cửa hàng A shopkeeper ( n ) Weak ( adj )-yếu Weak ( adj ) Strong ( adj )-khỏe Strong ( adj ) 2-Grammar structure Who is this? This is Chi. What does she do? / What is her job? She is a gymnast. Is she short? No, she isn’t. Is she tall? 3-WHILE-READING ( 15 minutes ) Yes, she is. -To help students reading a text about Chi and Tuan. Ask students to listen to the tape while 1-Practise listening and reading reading. Students read the text. Ask them to read the text by themselves. ……………………………………………… Comprehension question 2-Questions and answer a-What is Chi’s job? She is a gymnast. b-Is she tall and thin? Page 112 Yes, she is. c-Is she weak? No, she isn’t. d- Is she strong?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span> Yes, she is. e-What does Tuan do? He is a weightlift. e-Is he short and fat? Yes, he is. f-Is he heavy and strong? Yes, he is. 4-POST-READING (10 minutes ) Write it up Ask students to write five sentences to describe one of their close friends.. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home write five sentences to describe your father and mother.. Practise writing -My close friend’s name is A. -She is very tall. -She is not thin. -She is not light. -She isn’t weak. -She is very strong. …………………………………………....... …………………………………………........ Page 113 Planning date:January 1st 2012. Teaching date:January 3rd 2012. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 9 THE BODY Week 21 Period 58 FACES ( B1-B3 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe someone’s faces and describe features ( using words for colour ) Vocabulary black, white, yellow, hair , eyes , nose Structure what colour is her hair ? It is black. II-PREPARATION Teacher: picture of someone’s face for avtivity 1, box of colour for activity 2 Students: photos of some people III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students to look at the photos of some He is tall and fat. people and describe them. She is thin and tall …………………………………………....... …………………………………………....... 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words hair ( n )-tóc hair ( n ) eye ( n )-mắt eye ( n ) nose ( n )-mũi nose ( n ) mouth ( n )-miệng mouth ( n ) ear ( n )-tai ear ( n ) lips ( n )-môi lips ( n ) round ( adj )-tròn round ( adj ) oval ( adj )-elip oval ( adj ) full ( adj )-đầy full ( adj ) long ( adj )-dài long ( adj ) short ( adj )-ngắn short ( adj ) black ( adj )-màu đen black ( adj ) grey ( adj )-mầu sám grey ( adj ) red ( adj )-mầu đỏ red ( adj ) blue ( adj )-xanh da trời blue ( adj ) brown ( adj )-mầu nâu brown ( adj ) white ( adj )-mầu trắng white ( adj ) yellow ( adj )-mầu vàng yellow ( adj ) green ( adj )-xanh lá cây green ( adj ) purple ( adj )-mầu hồng purple ( adj ) Model sentence 2-Grammar structure He has a round face. She has full lips. They have long hair. They have black eyes. He has yellow hair. Page 114 She has red lips. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise asking and answering about colour.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span> Ask students to listen to the tape while reading new words. Ask them to look at the picture of a man’s face and put the words into the right parts of his face. Picture drill ( B3 page 101). 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise describing people by themselves Finding friend. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 3 on page 86 workbook. Exercise 3: Draw the boy and the girl.. Practise speaking Students practise reading new words. ( B1, B2 ) Picture of a man’s face.----hair ----eye ----mouth ………… Doll 1: What colour is his hair? It is green. What colour are his eyes? They are red. Doll 2: What colour is her hair? It is gray. What colour are her eyes? They are green. Doll 3: What colour is his hair? It is red. What colour are her eyes? They are black. Practise speaking She has eyes hair ……… black v brown v v gray v v white v red v v yellow v blue v green v Ex: She has brown hair. She has green eyes.. lips. teeth. v v v. ……………………………………………… ………………………………………………. Page 115 nd. Planning date:January 2 2012. Teaching date:January 4th 2012. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 9 THE BODY Week 21 Period 59 FACES ( B4-B6 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe people by reading a text about Miss.Chi. Vocabulary words for colour ( revision ) Structure Is Miss Chi’s hair long or short? II-PREPARATION Teacher:picture and cassette for activity 4 Students: picture for activity 5 III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To lead students into new lesson. Play games Let students sing the song “ Head and …………………………………………........ shoulders, knees and toes”. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ 2-PRE-READING ( 15 minutes ) -To help students choose the right pictures by listening, predict somethings about Miss. Chi. 1-Choose the right picture Ask students to look at activity 5 on page He has an oval face and thin lips. 102. Listen to the teacher and choose the picture a right picture. He has a round face. picture c She has a small face and long hair. picture b Her hair isn’t long and isn’t short. She has full lips. picture d Gap fill prediction 2-Prediction ( B4 page 101).Ask students to look at the Miss.Chi is …………. and thin. picture and fill in the gaps. She has a …… face ……. …… hair. She has …… eyes, a …… nose, ……. lips and small ……. teeth. 3-WHILE-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise reading Ask students to listen to the tape while reading. Ask them to read again and then check their prediction. Comprehension question Question and answer a-Is Miss.Chi’s hair long or short? Her hair is long. b-What colour is her hair? It is black. c-What colour are her eyes? They are brown. Page 116 d-Is her nose big or small? It is small. e-Are her lips full or thin? Her lips are full..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span> 4-POST-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students describe someone. Survey. Practise speaking. body face hair. my partner thin round short, sblack. my mum. my dad. my brother. eyes nose. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 4 on page 86 workbook. Exercise 4: Read. Ex: My partner is thin. He has short black hair and brown eyes. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... Page 117 th. Planning date:January 7 2012. Teaching date:January 9th 2012. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 10 STAYING HEALTHY Week 22 Period 60 HOW DO YOU FEEL? ( A1-A2 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson,students will be able to talk about how they feel using adjectives of physical state. Vocabulary hungry, thirsty, full, hot Structure How do you feel? I feel hungry / I am hungry. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette for activity 1, 5 picture for activity 1 Students:picture for activity 5 III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students to work in groups. Ask and Picture a: What colour is this? answer about the colour of the pictures on It is green page 104. Picture b: What colour is that ? It is red. ……………………………………………… 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words and the form to ask and answer about felling Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words hungry ( adj )-đói hungry ( adj ) thirsty ( adj )-khát thirsty ( adj ) full ( adj )-no, đầy full ( adj ) hot ( adj )-nóng hot ( adj ) cold ( adj )-lạnh cold ( adj ) tired ( adj )-mệt tired ( adj ) Model sentence 2-Grammar structure How do you feel? I feel hot / I am hot. How does she feel? She is hungry / she feels hungry. How do they feel? They are tired / they feel tired. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise asking and answering about feeling. Work cue drill Practise speaking How do you feel ? HUNGRY THIRSTY HOT I am hungry. COLD TIRED FULL How do you feel? I am thirsty. How do they feel ? They feel hot. How does she feel ? Page upload.123doc.net She feels cold. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise by themselves.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span> Guessing game LẠNH MỆT. NÓNG ĐÓI. KHÁT NO. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1 on page 87. Exercise 1: What is true for you? Check.. Speaking and writing S1: Are you thirsty? S2: No, I am not. S1: How do you feel ? S2: I am hungry. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... Page 119 th. Planning date:January 8 2012. Teaching date:January10th 2012. Total: ………… Absentees: …………………… UNIT 10 STAYING HEALTHY.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span> Week 22 Period 61 HOW DO YOU FEEL? ( A3-A4 ) I-OBJECTIVE Reading a dialogue to recognize polite offers and requests with “ What would you like? “ and “ I’d like some / a … / to …” Vocabulary would like, some, juice, noodle Structure What would he like? He would like some orange juice. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette for activity 3 Students: big papers to do exercise in groups III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask some students to stand up and express I feel hungry. how they feel now. I feel thirsty. I feel cold. ……………………………………………… …………………………………………….... 2-PRE-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, the form would like……. Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words Some orange juice ( n )-nước cam Some orange juice ( n ) Some noodle ( n )-mì, phở Some noodle ( n ) To want ( v )= would like ( v-ph )- muốn To want ( v ) = would like ( v-ph ) To like ( v )-thích To like ( v ) Modal sentence 2-Grammar structure I would like some water. He would like some orange juice. Their parents would like some noodle. ( would like for all perseons ) What would you like ? I’d like some milk. ( I’d like = I would like ) Predict dialogue 3-Prediction Nam: How do you feel ? Lan: ………………… and ……………… Nam: What would you like? Lan: I’d like some ……... What about you? Nam: I’m …… I ‘d like some ……………. 3-WHILE-READING ( 15 minutes ) -To help students practise reading. Ask students to listen to the tape while 1-Practise listening and reading reading ( A 3 page 105 ). Students read the dialogue. Ask students to read the dialogue and correct ……………………………………………… their predict dialogue. ……………………………………………… Page 120 Ask students to read the dialogue again and 2-Matching match the key words to the people. FEELING LAN NAM BA hot v.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span> 4-POST-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise speaking about themselves Mapped dialogue You your friend feel? …….cold + hungry like? …some noodles. …feel? thirsty …….like? orange juice 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 2, 3 on page 87-88 workbook. Exercise 2: Write. Answer these questions. Exercise 3: Fill in each black with a suitable word from the box.. tired v thirsty v full hungry noodles a drink v orange v juice to sit down v How does Lan feel? She feels hot. What would she like ? She would like some orange juice. …………………………………….……….. Speaking -How do you feel? I am cold and hungry. -What would you like? I’d like some noodles. How do you feel? I am thirsty. -What would you like? I would like some orange juice. ……………………………………………… ………………………………………………. ……………………………………………… ………………………………………………. Page 121 Planning date:January 9th 2012. Teaching date:January 11th 2012. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 10 STAYING HEALTHY.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span> Week 22 Period 62 HOW DO YOU FEEL? ( A5-A7 ) I-OBJECTIVE Listening for the right pictures and by the end of the lesson, students will be able to express what they would like. Vocabulary to see, to hear, to smell, to taste Structure what do you want? I want ……… what does he want? he wants ……… II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette and pictures a, b, c for activity 5 Students:pictures d, e, f. III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Ask students some questions.. CONTENT Speaking How do you feel to day? I feel very cold to day. What would you like? I would like a hot drink.. 2-PRE-LISTENING ( 10 minutes ) -To give students some information of the listening task before listening Question and answer Ask students to look at each picture. Listen Picture a and the answer the questions for each picture. -How does the boy in picture a feel? He feels hungry. -What would he like? He would like some noodles. We can say: The boy in picture a feels hungry so he would like some noodles. Picture b -How does the girl in picture b feel? She feels thirsty. -What would she like? She would like some water. We can say: The girl in picture b feels thirsty so she would like some water. …………………………………………....... …………………………………………....... If Phuong is the boy in picture a the listening task will give you the information below. -Phuong feels hungry. He would like some noodles or rice. So you only match Phoung with picture a. 3-WHILE-LISTENING ( 15 minutes ) -To help students practise listening. Ask students to listen to the tape and match the names with the right pictures.. 1-Listen and match Phuong ----- picture b Nhan -------- picture a Page 122 Ba --------- picture f Huong ----- picture d. 4-POST-LISTENING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students make new dialogues by.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span> themselves. Ask students to read the dialogue between Nhan and Dung. Ask them use the words given to make similar dialogues.. Practise reading and speaking Students read the dialogue. a-hungry / noodles A-What the matter, B? B-I am hungry. A-What do you want? B-I want noodles. ……………………………………………… ………………………………………………. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 4 on page 88 workbook. Exercise 4: Write in your exercise book. ……………………………………………… What do they want? ………………………………………………. Planning date:January 28th Teaching date:January 30th UNIT 10 Week 23. Page 123 2012. 2012. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… STAYING HEALTHY Period 63 FOOD AND DRINK ( B1-B3 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about food and drink using some / any with there is / there are, positive, negative and Yes-No questions. Vocabulary apple, orange, banana, water Structure There is some rice. There are some apples. II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette and picture for activity 1 Students:picture for activity 1 III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To lead students into the new lesson Speaking Networks FOOD--chicken DRINK--milk Ask students to find the words for food and beef orange juice for drink. ………. ……… 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, how to use some / any with there is / there are …… Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words An apple ( n )-quả táo An apple ( n ) An orange ( n )-quả cam An orange ( n ) A banana ( n )-quả chuối A banana ( n ) Some water ( n )-nước Some water ( n ) Some ( adj )-một vài, một ít ( dùng cho câu Some ( adj ) khảng định ) Any ( adj ) Any ( adj )- một vài, một ít ( dùng cho câu Rice, water, banana, milk, vegetables, apple, phủ định và nghi vấn ) meat, orange, noodles, hot drink, bread, Ask students to choose which words go with orange juice, cold drink. a, which ones go with an or some. a an some banana apple rice ……….. ………. ……. Model sentences 2-Grammar structure a / an is used before singular noun. an is used before consonant sounds. an is used before vowel sounds. some / any is used before uncountable noun and plural noun. Affirmative: There is some rice. There are some apples. Negative: There isn’t any rice. There aren’t any apples. Interrogative: Is there any rice? Are there any apples? 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) Page 124 -To help students practise how to use a / an or some. Picture drill ( B1 page 108 ) Practise speaking S1: What would you like ?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span> S2: I’d like a banana.What would you like? S2: I’d like an orange. S3: What would you like? S4: I’d like some water. What would you like? S3: I’d like some milk. ………………………………………...……. S1: Is there some rice? S2: Yes. There is some rice. S3: Are there any bananas? S4: No. There aren’t any bananas. …………………………………………........ 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise writing with there is any ……. / there are some …… there is not any …… / there aren’t any …… Ask students to write sentences about their school ( using there is / there are + some ….. there is not any …… / there aren’t any ….). 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 2, 3 on page 89-90 work book. Exercise 2: Look at the picture. Then write the answers. Exercise 3: What is true for you? Check.. Practise writing Ex: In my school, there are some trees. there aren’t any flowers. …………………………………………….... ……………………………………………… ………………………………………………. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... Page 125 Planning date:January 29th 2012. Teaching date:January 31st 2012. Total: …………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 10 STAYING HEALTHY Week 23 Period 64 FOOD AND DRINK ( B4-B5 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know uncountable and plural food and drink nouns, and they can make polite requests and polite offers. Vocabulary chicken, fish, meat, rice, fruit Structure What would you like ? I’d like some noodles. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette for activity 4-5 Students:picture for activity 5. III-PROCEDURE. TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Ask students some questions.. 2-PRESENTATION ( 10 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, review the form would like. Pre-teach vocabulary Chicken ( n )-thịt gà Fish ( n )-cá Meat ( n )-thịt Rice ( n )-gạo Fruit ( n )-quả, củ Milk ( n )-sữa Model sentences 3-PRACTICE ( 15 minutes ) -To help students practise speaking and listening Picture drill ( B4 page 110 ). Matching ( B 5 page 111 ) Ask students to listen to the tape and match.. CONTENT Speaking T-How do you feel now? S-I feel hot. T-What would you like? S-I would like some hot tea.. 1-New words Chicken ( n ) Fish ( n ) Meat ( n ) Rice ( n ) Fruit ( n ) Milk ( n ) 2-Grammar structure I’d like some chicken / rice / orange juice vegetables.. 1-Practise speaking What would you like? I’d like some fish. What would you like? I’d like some chicken. What would you like ? I’d like some orange juice. What would she like? She’d like some milk. What would they like ? They would like some beef. 2-Practise listening Page 126 b e e. c h i. f i s. v e g. f r u. r i c. m i l. j u i.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span> f. Nhan Tuan Huong Mai. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise speaking by themselves Chain game. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1 on page 89, exercise 4 on page 90 workbook. Exercise 1: Lable the following items. Exercise 4: Write.. c k e n. h. e t a b e. i t. v v. e. k. c e. v v v. v. v v. What would Nhan like ? He’d like some beef. What would Tuan like? He’d like some chicken. What would Huong like? He’d like some fruit and milk. What would Mai like? He’d like some chicken and juice.. Speaking S1: I’d like some fish. S2: I’d lke some fish and some vegetables. S3: I’d like some fish, some vegetables and some oranges juice. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... …………………………………………........ Ex: I am hungry.I would like some fish and some rice.. Page 127 th. Planning date:January 30 2012. Teaching date:February 1st 2012. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 10 STAYING HEALTHY Week 23 Period 65 MY FAVORITE FOOD ( C1-C4 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson,students will be able to talk about favorite food and drink to contrast “ Would you like ……. ? with Do you like ………. ? “ Vocabulary favorite, food, drink, carrot, tomato, lettuce Structure What’s your favorite food? I like chicken. Do you like carrots? Yes, I do. No, I don’t. II-PREPARATION Teacher: picture for activity 1 Students: picture for activity 3 III-PROCEDURE. TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To lead students into the new lesson Guessing game I’d like some water.. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, help students distinguish “ do you like ……. and would you like ………” Pre-teach vocabulary Favorite ( adj)-được ưa thích Food ( n )-đồ ăn Drink ( n )-đồ uống Carrot ( n )-cà rốt Tomato ( n )-cà chua Lettuce ( n )-rau riếp Potato ( n )-khoai tây Bean ( n )-đỗ Pea ( n )-đậu hà lan Cabbage ( n )-cải bắp Onion ( n )-hành tây Model sentences. CONTENT Speaking S1: Would you like an orange? S2: No, I wouldn’t S1: Would you like some chicken? S2: No, I wouldn’t. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... 1-New words Favorite ( adj ) Food ( n ) Drink ( n ) Carrot ( n ) Tomato ( n ) Lettuce ( n ) Potato ( n ) Bean ( n ) Pea ( n ) Cabbage ( n ) Onion ( n ) 2-Grammar structure ( ask about hobby ) Do you like vegetables? Yes, I do / No, I don’t. ( invitation ) Would you like some vegetables? Yes, I would / Yes please. No, I wouldn’t / No, thank you.. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help studdents practise the forms “ do Page 128 you like………? Would you like………?. Word cue drill. beans iced tea. peans oranges. carrots rice. milk aple. Practise speaking S1: Do you like beans?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span> juice. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise speaking by themselves. Survey. Name Nam. likes chicken orange juice. doesn’t like fish……….......... Thuy. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1, 2 on page 91 workbook. Exercise 1: Look at the picture and write a list of the food you like and a list of the food you don’t like. Exercise 2: Answer. Write the answers.. S2: Yes, I do. S1: Would you like some beans now? S2: Yes, please. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... Speaking and writing S1: Nam! Do you like chicken and orange juice? S2: Yes, I do. S1: Do you like fish? S2: No, I don’t. Nam likes chicken and orange juice but he doesn’t like fish.. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... Page 129 Planning date:February 4th 2012. Teaching date:February 6th 2012. Total: ............ Absentees: …………………… UNIT 11 WHAT DO YOU EAT? Week 24 Period 66 AT THE STORE ( A1 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about things people buy at the store ( using quantifiers a kilo of …… and containers a bottle of ………. Vocabulary eggs, chocolates, oil, beef, soap, toothpaste Structure a kilo of rice, a box of chocolate, a dozen of eggs II-PREPARATION Teacher:pictures for activity 1b, cassette for activity 1 Students:picture for activity 1a III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students: Which words given below can go after some? eggs, an egg, milk, chicken,water, an apple, meat, bananas, oranges, orange juice ………………………………………............ eggs, an egg Some milk ……………………... chicken …………………....... water an apple meat bananas 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, how to use quantifiers and containers. Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words Some eggs ( plu-n )-vài quả trứng Some eggs ( plu-n ) chocolates ( plu-n )-sôcôla chocolates ( plu-n ) Some oil ( uncoun-n )-dầu ăn Some oil ( uncoun-n ) beef ( uncoun-n )-thịt bò beef ( uncoun-n ) soap ( uncoun-n )-xà phòng soap ( uncoun-n ) toothpaste ( uncoun-n )-kem đánh răng toothpaste ( uncoun-n ) Matching 2-Grammar structure grams of cooking oil a kilo of tea a bar of chocolates a can of rice a box of beef a tube of egss a packet of peas a dozen of soap a bottle of toothpaste Page 130 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise how to use Practise speaking quantifiers and containers Picture-drill.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span> a-I’d like a bottle of cooking oil. b-She would like a packet of tea. c-They would like a box of chocolates. …………………………………………….... …………………………………………….... 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise making dialogues. Practise speaking and writing Ask students to make a similar dialogue ( using dialogue 1a with words or phrases in A-Can I help you? 1 b ). B-Yes. A packet of tea, please. A-Here you are. B-Thank you. ……………………………………………..... ……………………………………………..... 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 2 on page 93 Exercise 1: Put these words in the right workbook. column Bottles, water, fruit, meat, soap, bananas, rice, can ,noodles, fish, soda, lemonade, toothpaste, cookies, cabbage, orange juice, box Things we Things we Things we can eat can drink cant eat or drink. Page 131 Planning date: February 5th 2012. Teaching date:February 7th 2012. Total: ……....... Absentees: …………………… UNIT 11 WHAT DO YOU EAT? Week 24 Period 67 AT THE STORE ( A2-A3 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span> I-OBJECTIVE Listening for specific information about quantities for food shopping. Vocabulary to want, to need, how much, how many Structure How much beef does she want? How many oranges deos she want? II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette for activity 2 Students:picture for activity 3 III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students to find the words for things in Picture a –a box of cookies the five pictures on page 117. b-a can of soda c-a box of chocolates d-a tube of toothpaste e-a bar of soap 2-PRE-LISTENING ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, presict the content of the dialogue between salesgirl and Ba. Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words “Can I help you?” ( polite offer ) “Can I help you?” ( polite offer ) To want ( v )-muốn To want ( v ) To need ( v )-cần To need ( v ) How much………….? (wh-question used How much ………….? (wh-question used for uncountable noun ) for uncountable noun ) How many…………? ( wh-question used How many ……….? ( wh-question used for countable noun ) for countable noun ) cookies ( n )-bánh quy cookies ( n ) Predict dialogue 2-Prediction Salesgirl:Can I help you? Guess Answer Ba: Yes. I’d like some ( 1 ) ……..., please 1-………….. 1-beef Salesgirl:How much do you want? 2-………….. 2-200 Ba: ( 2 ) ……….. grams,please. 3-………….. 3-eggs Salesgirl: Is there anything else? 4-………….. 4-a dozen Ba:Yes, I need some ( 3 ) ……………….. …………………………………………........ Salesgirl: How many do you want? …………………………………………........ Ba: ( 4 ) ………………, please. 3-WHILE-LISTENING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise listening Ask students to listen to the tape and check their prediction. Comprehension questions 1-Question and answer a-Where is Ba? He is in the store. Page 132 b-What does he want? He wants some eggs and some beef. c-How much beef does he want? He wants two hundred grams..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span> Ask students to listen to the tape and fill in the table.. d-How many eggs does he want? He wants a dozen. 2-Complete the table Phuong Ly Mai Nam. 4-POST-LISTENING ( 10 minutes ) -To check students’understand Ask students to write down the things Phuong and her friends want. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 4, 5 on page 94 workbook. Exercise 4: Complete the dialogue. Exercise 5: You are the customer. Complete the conversation between you and salesgirl.. Picture-d Picture-e, a Picture-b Picture-c. Practise writing Phuong wants a tube of toothpast. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... Page 133 th. Planning date:February 6 2012. Teaching date:February 8th 2012. Total: ……….... Absentees: …………………… UNIT 11 WHAT DO YOU EAT? Week 24 Period 68 AT THE STORE ( A4 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson,students will be able to talk about quantities ( using how much ……..? and how many ………..? with “ want “ and “ need “. Vocabulary half a kilo of, half a dozen, one kilo, two kilos Structure How much beef do you want? How many eggs do you need? II-PREPARATION Teacher:words for food on a big paper Students:picture for activity 4 III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Writing Dictation lists ( How much ………., how many ………..) How much …….? How many ……..? Oranges, meat, bananas, milk, oil, bread, meat, milk, bread, oranges, bananas, carrots, chocolates, beef, chicken, rice, eggs, beef, chicken, rice, carrots, chocolates apples, soap soap eggs, apples 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the form and how to use of Grammar structure how much ……? How many …….? How much ………….? ( wh-question )-bao How much ………….? ( wh-question ) nhiêu Used for uncountable noun. Used for uncountable noun. How many ………….? ( wh-question ) How many ………….? ( wh-question )-bao Used for countable noun, nhiêu Used for countable noun. Model sentences I need some beef. I need some beef. want want How much beef do you need? / want ? How much beef do you need? / want ? I need some eggs. I need some eggs want want How many eggs do you need? want ? How many eggs do you need? want ? 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise question with how much ……….? How many ………..? Ask students to read the text on page 117. Blackboard drill Practise speaking Shopping list 300 grams:beef S1: I need some beef. 1 kilogram: rice S2: How much do you want? 500 grams: bean S1: Three hundred grams, please. 6 apples S3: I need some apples. 1 dozen: eggs S4: How many apples do you want? 2 bottles: milk S3: Six apples, please. Page 134 3 packets: noodles …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise making a.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span> dialogue. Ask studenst to complete the dialogue Salesperson: Can I help you? Customer: Yes. I would like some meat. Salesperson: ………. do you want? Customer: A kilo, please Salesperson: A kilo of meat. Is there ……… else? Customer: Yes. I ……… some bananas. Salesperson: ……… do you want? Customer: Five, ……... and ………… sugar Salesperson: ………….. do you want? Customer: Half a kilo, please. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do esercise 3 on –page 94 workbook. Exercise 3: Use the words in the box to make five dialogues.. Planning date:February 11th Teaching date:February 13th UNIT 11 Week 25. Practise speaking and writing Salesperson: Can I help you? Customer: Yes. I would like some meat. Salesperson: How much do you want? Customer: A kilo, please Salesperson: A kilo of meat. Is there anything else? Customer: Yes. I need some bananas. Salesperson: How many do you want? Customer: Five, please and some sugar. Salesperson: How much do you want? Customer: Half a kilo, please. Ex: Shopkeeper: Can I help you? Huong: Yes. A kilo of sugar, please. Shopkeeper: Here you are. Huong: Thank you.. Page 135 2012. 2012. Total: ……….... Absentees: …………………… WHAT DO YOU EAT? Period 69 AT THE CANTEEN ( B1-B2 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer about the price. Vocabulary rice, noodles, chicken, orange juice, milk ……….. Structure How much are a sandwich and a glass of lemon juice? They are 15.000 VND. II-PREPARATION Teacher:pictures for activity 1 and cassette for activity 2 Students:learn by heart the words for food at home. III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students to play a game ( Kim’s game ) ( B1 page 119 ) There is a There is There are can of soda. some rice. some ………….... ………….... vegetables. ………….... ………….... ……............. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the form to ask and answer about the price, how to say the amount of money Grammar tructure How much + are + subject? ( ask ) Ex: How much are these bananas? Subject + are + amount of money. They are one thousand VND. ( respond ) How much are those table and chairs? We can say the amount of money as cardinal They are 5.500.000 VND ( five million, five numbers. hundred thousand ) How much are two bikes? They are 1.512.963 VND. ( one million, five hundred and twelve thousand, nine hundred and sixty three ). 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise asking and answering about the price. Board drill Practise speaking -three books ------ 5.000 dong S1: How much are three books? -two pens --------- 10.650 dong S2: They are five thousand dong. -10 notebooks ------ 20.000dong S3: How much are these two pens? -2 rulers ------- 1.000dong S4: They are ten thousand six hundred and -3 shirts ------- 370.000dong fifty dong. S5: How much are ten notebooks? S6: They are twenty thousand dong. S7: How much are two rulers? S8: They are one thousand dong. S9: How much are three shirts? S10: They are three hundred and seventy thousand dong. Page 136 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help studenst practise by themselves Put these sentences in the correct order to Practise speaking and writing make a dialogue..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span> 1-How many do you want? 2-A bottle, please. 3-Thirty-four thousand dong. 4-Can I help you? 5-Half a dozen eggs. Is there anything else? 6-Here you are. 7-How much do you need? 8-Yes, I’d like some eggs, please. 9-Thanks. How much are they? 10-Yes, I need some cooking oil. 11-Half a dozen, please 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1, 2 on page 95 workbook. Exercise 1: What can you buy at the canteen at your school? Check. Exercise 2: Look at the pictures. Then complete the dialogue.. Planning date:February 12th Teaching date:February 14th UNIT 11 Week 25. A-Can I help you? B-Yes, I’d like some eggs, please. A-How many do you want? B- Half a dozen, please. A- Half a dozen eggs. Is there anything else? B- Yes, I need some cooking oil. A- How much do you need? B- A bottle, please. A- Here you are. B- Thanks. How much are they? A- Thirty-four thousand dong.. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... Page 137 2012. 2012. Total: ………... Absentees: …………………… WHAT DO YOU EAT? Period 70 AT THE CANTEEN ( B3-B5 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, student will be able to talk about prices for food and drink with “ How much is it?” Vocabulary a canteen, a fried rice, a bowl of…. Structure How much is this can of soda? It is ten thousand VND. II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette for activity 4,5 Students: picture for activity 5 III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Listening p p p p p p p p p p p p Matching ( B4 page 120 ) ic ic ic ic ic ic ic ic ic ic ic ic Ask students to look at the pictures in B1and tu tu tu tu tu tu tu tu tu tu tu tu number the food as you hear. re re re re re re re re re re re re a. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To help students remember polite request and offer with would like, give them how to ask and answer about the price. Pre-teach vocabulary A hundred , two hundred ( n )-một, hai trăm A thousand ,three thousand ( n )-một, ba nghìn A cake ( n )-cai bánh A sandwich ( n )-bánh sandwich A fried rice ( n )-cơm rang An ice cream ( n )-que kem A bowl of……môt bát….. A bowl of rice ( n )- bát cơm Polite request and offer. How to ask and answer about the price. b 2. c 4. d. e 1. f 5. g. h 7. i 3. j 6. k. l 8. 1-New words A hundred, two hundred ( n ) A thousand, three thousand ( n ) A cake ( n ) A sandwich ( n ) A fried rice ( n ) An ice cream ( n ) A bowl of…… A bowl of rice ( n ) 2-Grammar structure What would + subject + like for breakfast? Subject + would like + …………………. Ex: What would you like for breakfast? I ‘d like some rice and some beef. What would she like for lunch? She’d like some noodles. How much + is + subject? ( ask ) Subject + is + amount of money. ( respond ) Ex: How much is this banana? It is one thousand VND.. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise making polite request, asking and answering about the Page 138 Word cue drill ( B 3 ) a-bread / milk b-noodles / water c-rice / orange juice. Practise speaking S1: What would you like for breakfast ? S2: I’d like some bread and some milk. S3: What would you like for lunch?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span> d-fish / soda f-chicken / iced tea g-beef / vegetablea / lemonade Picture drill ( B5 ). 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students prctise ask and answer about the price by themselves Survey Ask students to fill in the survey according to real prices they know.. S4: I’d like some fish and a can of soda. ……………………………………………..... …………………………………………......... S1: How much is a bowl of noodles? S2: It is three thousand VND. S3: How much is a sandwich? S4: It is one thousand five hundred VND. …………………………………………......... …………………………………………......... ………………………………………….......... Practise speaking and writing How much is it?. a fried rice ……... …….... a bowl of noodles ……..... ……..... a can ofcoke. a ruler. …….... …….... …….. ……... a shool bag ……... …….... Ex: How much is a fried rice? It is thirty thousand VND. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 3, 4 on page 96 workbook. Exercise 3: Write six true sentences about the canteen at your school. Exercise 4: Match the questions in column A with the answers in column B.. ……………………………………………..... ……………………………………………..... ……………………………………………...... Page 139 Planning date:February 13th 2012. Teaching date:February 15th 2012. Total: …….... Absentees: …………………….. Week 25 Period 71 GRAMMAR PRACTICE I-OBJECTIVE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span> Further practice in like and dislike ( simple present tense ), countability, adjective, question word, present progressive and simple present, quantifiers. Vocabulary all words in unit 9, 10, 11 ( revision ) Structure the simple present and present continuous tense ( revision ) II-PREPARATION Teacher:form of simple present and present progressive tense on a big paper Students: do all exercises in grammar practice at home III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students to give the form of the simple …………………………………………........ present and present progressive. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ 2-PRESENTATION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students remember how to use Grammar tsructure present progressive and simple present, The simple present S + V-( s / es ) + ………………………... S + don’t / doesn’t + V + .. Do / does + S + V + ……………………? Yes + S + do / does. No + S + don’t / doesn’t. Used to express habitual action. The present progressive S + am / is / are + V-ing ………………… S + am not / is not / are not + V-ing …….. Is / are + S + V-ing …………………......? Yes + S + am / is / are. No + S + am not / is not / are not. Used to express an action happening now. a / an + singular noun. an is used before words beginning with a vowel ( a, e, i, o, u ) or words beginning with a mute h. some / any + plural noun / uncountable noun some is used in affirmative, any in negative and interrogative. 3-PRACTICE ( 15 minutes ) -To help students practise using present progressive and simple present, a / an , Practise speaking Find someone who……….. Name some / any. ……….likes fish. Grammar practice 1 ……….doesn’t like chicken. Ask students to find someone who…… ……….likes bread Ex: Do you like noodles? ……….doesn’t like rice. ……….likes milk. ……….doesn’t like noodles. Page 140 Yes. I like noodles. Write it up. S1: Do you like rice? S2: No. I don’t like rice. …………………………………..………...... A likes fish..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span> B doesn’t like chicken. C likes milk. D doesn’t like noodles. Grammar practice 2 a / an / some / any Net work Grammar practice 3 Ask students to find the words which have opposite meaning with the words given. Ask them to use the words which they have just found out to complete grammar practice 3. Grammar practice 4. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students distinguish how to use the present progressive and the simple present. Grammar practice 5. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home review the simple present tense, polite request, quantifiers, partitive, words for colour, for part of the body and people’s appearance and feeling. Next lesson I am going to give you a test.. a sandwich banana ………… tall. fat. an orange ice-cream ………….. heavy. weak. some noodles fish …………….. hungry. hot. full. short. short. a-He isn’t tall. He is short. b-He isn’t fat. He is thin. …………………………………………........ ........................................................................ a-Who is in the livingroom? Bi and fifi are in the living room. b-What is Bi doing? He is doing his homework. c-How much homework does he have ? He has a lot of homework. d-What is fifi doing ? She is sleeping. e-Where is she ? She is under the table. Practise speaking and writing a-She eats a lot of fruit. She is eating an apple now. b-They drink juice. They are drinking some juice at the moment. c-He rides his bicycle everyday. He is riding his bicycle at the moment. d-She goes to bed early. She is going to bed now. e-She gets up early. She is getting up now. f-She travels by bus. She is travelling by bus now. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... Page 141 Planning date:February 18th 2012. Testing date: February 20th 2012. Total: .............. Absentees: …………………... Week 26 Period 72 WRITTEN TEST 4 I-OBJECTIVE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span> Themes / topics: Health ( parts of the body, health, food and drinks, the menu ) Language focus: Vocabulary ( words to describe parts of the body, colour, people’s appearance and feelings ) Grammar structures: Present simple tense, wh-question, Yes-No-question: Can you…….? , polite request would you ………../ do you like……….? Quantifier, partitive. II-PREPARATION Teacher: Photocopy paper tests Students:Review from unit 9 to unit 11 :Vocabulary (words to describe parts of the body, colour, people’s appearance and feelings ) Grammar structures: Present simple tense, wh-question,. III-FORM OF THE TEST Tên / Chủ đề Health -part of the boody, food and drink, health, the menu I-Listening Listen for specific information Phonetic 25% II-Reading True / false statement 25 % III-Language focus -complete the paragraph -correct form of the verb 25 % IV-Writing -rewiting -Use there is / are and the words or phrases given to write the full sentences 25 % Tổng số: 100 %. Nội dung cần kiểm tra. Food, drink and price / g / , / e / ,/  / , /  /. Nhận biết. Thông hiểu. Vận dụng Cấp độ thấp. Cấp độ cao. Số câu: 3 Số điểm: 1,5 Số câu : 4 Số điểm:1. Quantifiers, food and drink preposition the simple present, present progressive tense There is / are, would like. Cộng. Số câu : 7 Số điểm:2,5. Số câu : 5 Số điểm: 2,5. Số câu : 5 Số điểm:2,5. Số câu : 4 Số điểm: 1. Số câu : 9 Số điểm:2,5. Số câu: 5 Số điểm:1,5. Số câu:6 Số điểm: 2,5. Use the present contonuous tense to write about the activities your family are doing Số câu: 7 Số điểm:2,5. Số câu : 9 Số điểm: 3. Full name:........................................... Question I: Listening / Phonetic 1-Listen to the tape and complete the dialogue below. ( 1,5 points ) Salesgirl: Can I help you?. Số câu : 6 Số điểm:2,5. Số câu: 7 Số câu : 27 Số điểm: Số điểm:10 2,5 Page 142 Class 6.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span> Lan: Yes. I’d like a ………...... and a glass of ………………., please. Salesgirl: Here you are. Lan: How………..are they? Salesgirl: Two thousand five hundred dong. Thank you. 2-Circle the odd one out ( 1 point ). 1-A game B geography C vegetable D change 2-A read B teacher C eat D ahead 3-A tenth B math C brother D theater 4-A engineer B between C teeth D greeting Question II: Reading Read the passage and decide whether each of the following statements is true (T) or false ( F ). ( 2,5 points ) Quang is a gymnast. He is tall and thin. He has short black hair. His eyes are brown. He has a round face and thin lips. Quang is having dinner at the moment. He is eating fish. He often has fish, meat and vegetables for dinner. After dinner he eats bananas. Then he drinks orange juice. He feels full after dinner. ................ 1-Quang is short and big. ................ 2-He has short hair. ................ 3-His hair is white. ................ 4-He has brown eyes. ................ 5-Quang’s face is round and his lips are full. III-Languagr focus 1-Choose the best answer to complete these sentences ( 1 point ). I don’t usually eat breakfast. I only ( 1 )……..of coffee. I don’t eat ( 2 ) …….. until about eleven o’clock. Then I have a biscuit and a glass of ( 3 ) ……. For lunch I usually have a salad. That is ( 4 ) …….. about two o’clock ....... 1-A. a packet B. a cup C. a can D. a bar 2-A. any B. some C. anything D. something 3-A. peas B. rice C. chocolates D. milk 4-A. at B. on C. in D. of 2-Use the correct tense or form of the verb in brackets ( 1,5 point ). Where is your father? He ( be ) …….... in the bathroom. He ( brush ) ……… his teeth. He ( brush ) …………….his teeth in the morning and evening. ………….your children ( go ) ………..to school by bus today? Question IV-Writing 1-Read the first sentence , and then complete the second sentence with the same meaning. ( 0,5 point ) a-This box has twelve packets of tea. There ....................................................................... b-How many apples do you want? How many apples would .......................................? 2-Write a paragraph about the activities your family are doing. Using the suggested questions.( 2 points ) -where are your parents and what are they doing? -where is your brother and what is he doing? -where is your sister and what is she doing? -where are you and what are you doing? It is 9 a.m now ........................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................. Page 143 Planning date: February 20th 2012. Teaching date:February 21st 2012. Total: .............. Absentees: ………………...... Week 26 Period 73 CORRECTING THE TEST 4 I-OBJECTIVE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span> Teacher gives opinions about the students’ knowledge. There are some main knowledge you don’t understand perfectly such as how to write sentences with sone or any, some phrases such as a glass / cup of ….., something / anything ……….. II-PREPARATION Teacher comments. -listening skill is very bad. -reading skill is good. Most of all students get good marks in this part -writing skill needs to be improved more and more. -there are many mistakes when you do language focus test. III-CONTENT The test is not very difficult, the instruction is clear. We study all in unit 9, 10, 11. Question I : 2,5 points ( listening 1,5 point-each correct answer got 0,5 point. Phonetic 1 point-each correct answer got 0,25 point ) Question II : 2,5 points ( each correct answer got 0.5 point ). Question III: 2,5 points ( vocabulary 1 point-each correct answer got 0,25 point. Form of the verb 1,5 point-each correct answer got 0,3 point )). Question IV: 2,5 points ( rewrite sentences 0,5 point each correct sentence got 0,25 point. Writing: content 1,5 point, lay out 0,5 point ). Question I: Listening and Phonetic 1-Listening test Salesgirl: Can I help you? Lan: Yes. I’d like a sandwich and a glass of lemon juice, please. Salesgirl: Here you are. Lan: How much are they? Salesgirl: Two thousand five hundred dong. Thank you. You remember the words for food and drink very badly. Most of you all write them wrongly. Notice: At home learn by heart all words for food and drink. 2-Phonetics 1-A game B geography C vegetable D change 2-A read B teacher C eat D ahead 3-A tenth B math C brother D theater 4-A engineer B between C teeth D greeting You do this part very well. Please keep this at the next test. Question II: Reading 1-Quang is short and big. F 2-He has short hair. T 3-His hair is white. F 4-He has brown eyes. T 5-Quang’s face is round and his lips are full. F You do this part very well. Please keep this at the next test. Question III: Language focus test 1-Vocabulary I don’t usually eat breakfast. I only ( 1 ) …….. of coffee. I don’t eat ( 2 ) …….. until about eleven o’clock. Then I have a biscuit and a glass of ( 3 ) ……. For lunch I usually have a salad. That is ( 4 ) …….. about two o’clock. 1-A. a packet B. a cup C. a can D. a bar Page 144 2-A. any B. some C. anything D. something 3-A. peas B. rice C. chocolates D. milk 4-A. at B. on C. in D. of Remember some phrases below: a cup of tea / milk / coffe ……..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span> a glass of …………………….. any / some are adjectives, any used for negative and interrogative, some used for affirmative. Anything / something are nouns, anything used for for negative and interrogative Something used for affirmative. I don’t eat …………. this sentence needs an object and an object must be a noun so this space you choose anything. 2-Tense of the verb Where is your father? He ( be ) is in the bathroom. He ( brush ) is brushing his teeth. He ( brush ) brushes his teeth in the morning and evening. Are your children ( go ) going to school by bus today? Remember the form for the present simple tense and for the present progressive tense S + V-( s / es ) + …………. S + am / is / are + V-ing …. You do this part very well. Please keep this at the next test. Question IV: Writing 1-Rewriting a-This box has twelve packets of tea. There are twelve packets of tea in this box. b-How many apples do you want? How many apples would you like? There are many erros in this test. You have to practise do exercises like this at home. Remember: would like = want. Ex: She wants some beef = she would like some beef. 2-Writing -lay out -correct sentence: Ex: It is 9 oclock now. My parents are in the living room. They are watching a football match on TV. .................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................... RESULT TABLE SỒ BÀI KT 37 SỐ ĐIỂM %. ĐIỂM GIỎI 8-10. ĐIỂM KHÁ 7-8. ĐIỂM TB 5-6. ĐIỂM YẾU 3-4. ĐIỂM KÉM 1-2. 5-Home-work At home read unit 12 ( A ).. Planning date:February 20th Teaching date:February 22nd UNIT 12 Week 26. Page 145 2012. 2012. Total: ……….... Absentees: …………………… SPORTS AND PASTIMES Period 74 WHAT ARE THEY DOING? ( A ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span> I-OBJECTIVE Further practice in present progressive and sports vocabulary to talk about what people are doing now. Vocabulary play badminton / table tennis, do aerobics, skip , jog Structure What is she doing ? She is reading. What are they doing? They are playing football. II-PREPARATION Teacher: pictures, cassette for activity 1, 3 Students:big paper to do exercise in groups III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking and writing Jumbled words Torps sports Bolfatol football Belvalylol volleyball Mage game Sueim music Lietoseniv television 2-PRESENTATION / PRE-READING ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, help them remember the form and how to use the present progressive Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words To swim ( v )-bơi To swim ( v ) To play badminton ( v )-chơi cầu lông To play badminton ( v ) To jog ( v )-đi bộ To jog ( v ) To do aerobics ( v )-thể dục dụng cụ To do aerobics ( v ) To play table tennis ( v )-chơi bóng bàn To play table tennis ( v ) To skip ( v )-nhảy dây To skip ( v ) Model sentences 2-Grammar structure Affirmative: Subject + be + verb-ing ….. I am v-ing …….. She / he is v-ing ……. We / you / they are v-ing ……. Negative: Subject + be + not + v-ing …. I am not v-ing ……. She / he is not v-ing …… We / you / they are not v-ing …... Interrogative: Is / are + subject + v-ing.? Is + he / she + v-ing? Yes + he / she + is. No + he / she + isn’t. Are + you / they + v-ing ………? Page 146 Yes + I am, we / they are No + I am not, we / they aren’t Pre-reading Open-prediction ( A 4 ) 3-Prediction.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span> Ask students to predict sports Lan and Nam like. 3-PRACTICE / WHILE-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise using the present progressive and reading Practice Picture drill ( A1- A2 ). While-reading ( A 4 ) Ask students to read and correct openprediction. Comprehension question. 4-PRODUCTION / POST-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To check students’understand Picture drill ( A 3 ) Ask students to look at the pictures on page 125. Answer the questions. Write it up. ( A 5). 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1on page 103 workbook Exercise 1: Write sentences with present progressive tense.. Lan 1 2 3. Nam 1 2 3. 1-Practise speaking a-What is he doing? He is swimming. b-What are they doing ? They are playing badminton. c-What are they doing ? They are playing soccer. d-What is she doing ? She is skipping. 2-Practise reading …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ a-Which sports does Lan play? She plays badminton. b-Does Lan play tennis? No, she doesn’t. c-Which sports does Nam play? He plays soccer and table tennis. d-Does Nam play table tennis? Yes, he does.. 1-Practise speaking Which sports do you play? I play soccer and I swim. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ 2-Practise writing Which sports does Nam play? He skips and does aerobics. Which sports does Lan play? She jogs and plays table tennis.. Page 147 th. Planning date:February 25 Teaching date:February 27th UNIT 12 Week 27. 2012. 2012. Total:………. Absentees: …………………… SPORTS AND PASTIMES Period 75 FREE TIME ( B1-B4 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span> I-OBJECTIVE Writing short texts about what we do in our free time. Listening for the right picture Vocabulary read, listen to music, go fishing, play video game, go to the movie, watch TV Structure the simple present tense ( revision ) II-PREPARATION Teacher:picture for activity 1, pictures and cassette for activity 4 Students:big paper to write in groups III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To lead students into the new lesson Speaking Guessing game I …………… in my free time. S1: Do you play football in your free time? I do aerobics in my free time. S2: No, I don’t. S3: Do you watch TV? S2: No, I don’t. 2-PRE-WRITING / LISTENING ( 10 minutes ) -To give students new words, and hep them write, help them predict what Lien, Tan …... does in his / her free time. Pre-writing Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words Free time ( n )-thời gian rỗi Free time ( n ) To go fishing ( v )-đi câu To go fishing ( v ) To go to the movies ( v )-đi xem phim To go to the movies ( v ) ( Transformation ) Picture drill ( B 1 ) 2-Speaking a-What does Phuong do in his free time? He goes to the movies. b-What about Ly? She watches TV. ……………………………………................ Transformation writing 3-Writing a-Phuong goes to the movies in his free time. b-Ly ……………………………………....... c-Nam ……………………………................ d-Lan ……………………………………..... e-Tuan …………………………………....... f-Long …………………………………....... …………………………………………........ Ask students to read B3 and correct their …………………………………………........ own writing . Pre-listening Ask students to look at the pictures on page 128 and then predict what Tan and his friends Page 148 do in their free time. Name Activities Ex: Tan listens to the radio in his free Tan watch TV. Time. listen to the radio. Minh and Nam go fishing..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span> Lien Lan and Mai 3-WHILE- WRITING / LISTENING ( 15 minutes ) -To help students practise writing and listening. While-writing Ask students to write three things about what they do in their spare time. In groups they put all their sentences together on a poster.. While-listening. 4-POST-WRITING / LISTENING ( 10 minutes ) -To check students’ understand Post-writing Ask students to show their writing task. Teacher corrects mistake if having. Post-listening Write it up Ask students write what they hear.. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 2 on page 105 workbook. Exercise 2: Write what you do with your friends in your free time.. go to the movie. play games. read books.. 1-Practise writing ( A writes ) I watch TV, I go fishing and I play football. ( B writes ) I watch TV, I go to the park and I play badminton. ( C writes ) I listen to music, I play football and I watch TV. Group writing poster. A, B and C watch TV. A and C play football. A goes fishing. B goes to the park and plays badminton. C listens to music. 2-Practise listening Name Activities Tan watch TV. listen to the radio. Minh and Nam go fishing. go to the movie. Lien play games. read books. Lan and Mai. …………………………………………....... …………………………………………....... Writing Tan reads books in his free time. Minh and Nam play games in their free time. Lien watches TV in her free time. Lan and Mai listen to the radio in their spare time.. Page 149 Planning date:February 26th 2012. Teaching date:February 28th 2012. Total:………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 12 SPORTS AND PASTIMES Week 27 Period 76 FREE TIME ( B5 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span> I-OBJECTIVE How often ……..? questions and answers “ once / twice / three times ………. a week to talk about frequency of activities. Vocabulary How often, once a week, twice a week, three / four times …….. a week Structure How often do you go fishing? I go fishing once a week. How often does he watch TV? He watches three times a week II-PREPARATION Teacher:Ly’s diary for activity 5 Students:picture for activity 5. III-PROCEDURE. Page 150 times ………. a week “ Picture drill. Practise speaking How often does Ly go to school? She goes six time a week..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span> How often does she play badminton? She plays three times a week. How often does she play tennis? She plays once a week. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise speaking by themselves Find someone who How often do you play football? Once a week. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 4, 5 on page 105-106 workbook. Exercise 4: Answer the questions about you. Exercise 5: Complete the sentences about you with once a week, twice a week ……. Speaking Find someone who ………….? Name ….. play football twice a week. A ….. goes to the park once a B Week. …… watches TV seven times a week. …… plays badminton twice a week. …… does homework six time a week. A plays football twice a week. B goes to the park once a week. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... Page 151 th. Planning date: February 27 Teaching date:February 29th UNIT 12 Week 26. 2012. 2012. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… SPORTS AND PASTIMES Period 77 HOW OFTEN ………? ( C1- C4 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span> I-OBJECTIVE Reading a picture story to understand the details and practise adverbs of frequency with the present tense for regular activities. Vocabulary have a pinic, fly their kite, go camping, always, usually, often …….. Structure How often do you go to the zoo? I never go to the zoo. How often does he go to school? He always goes to school in the morning. II-PREPARATION Teacher:picture for activity 2 Students:big paper to do exercise in groups. III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Noughts and crosses How often do you swim? Twice a week.. CONTENT Speaking swim go to school watch TV. 2-PRE-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words Pre-teach vocabulary Always ( adv of frequency )-luôn luôn Usually (adv of frequency )-thường xuyên Often (adv of frequency )-thường Sometimes (adv of frequency )-thỉnh thoảng Never ( adv of frequency )-không bao giờ. 3-WHILE-READING ( 15 minutes ) -To help students practise reading Ask students to guess the meaning of the. read a book. play tennis play football do homework listen to play music volleyball. 1-New words Always ( adv of frequency ) Usually (adv of frequency ) Often (adv of frequency ) Sometimes (adv of frequency ) 2-Grammar structure Never (adv of frequency ) How often do Ba and Lan go to the zoo? They sometimes go to the zoo. How often do you help your mom? I always help my mom. Notive: adverbs of frequency are normally placed. -after the simple tenses of to be. -before the simple tenses of all other verbs. -with compound tenses, they are placed after the first auxiliary, or , with interrogative verbs, after auxiliary + subject.. Page 152 words ( using the pictures ) Grids. 1-Speaking 1-thả diều ………………… 2-cái lều …………………...

<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span> 3-đi cắm trại ……………… 4-đi dã ngoại …………....... How often do they …. go to the zoo? go to the park? have a picnic? do sports? fly kites? go camping? walk to school? do homework? Comprehension question. 4-POST-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To check students’ understand. Ask students. ne ver. so me tim es v. oft en. us al ua wa lly ys. v v v v v v v. 2-Question and answer a-How often do they go to the zoo? About three times a year. b-How often do they go to the park? Twice a week. c-Do they go camping? Are they late for school? No, never d-Do they walk to school? Do they do their homework? Yes, always. Question and answer a-How often do you go to the zoo? I sometimes go to the zoo. b-How often do you go to the park? I never go to the park. c-How often do you play sport? I often play sport. d-How often do you go camping? I usualy go camping. ………………………………………….......... 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1, 2 on page 106-107 workbook. ……………………………………………..... Exercise 1: How often do you do these ……………………………………………..... things? Check . Exercise 2: Read. Then answer the questions. ……………………………………………...... Page 153 rd. Planning date:March 3 Teaching date:March 5th UNIT 12 Week 28. 2012. 2012. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… SPORTS AND PASTIMES Period 78 HOW OFTEN ………? ( C5- C6 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span> I-OBJECTIVE Reading a short text to understand the details and get further practice in simple present tense, adverbs of frequency and outdoor pastimes vocabulary. Listening for specific information. Vocabulary boots, warm, a camping store, to camp over night Structure How often do Nga and Lan do these things? They sometimes go camping. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette for activity 5 Students:paper to do exercise in groups III-PROCEDURE. Page 154 3-WHILE-READING / LISTENING ( 15 minutes ) -To help students practise reading and listening.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span> While-reading Ask students to listen to the tape while reading the text. Ask them to work in groups to answer the questions. Comprehension question. While-listening Ask students to listen to the tape and check their prediction.. 4-POST-READING / LISTENING ( 10 minutes ) -To check students’ understand Post-reading Writing Ask students to write a short paragraph about what they often do at the weekend ( use adverb of frequency and words in networks ) Post-listening Ask students to write about Lan and Nga. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 3 on page 107 workbook. Exercise 3: Answer these questions about you.. 1-Practise reading Students read the text. …………………………………………........ 2-Question and answer a-What does Minh like doing? He likes walking. b-What do they always wear? They always wear strong boots and warm clothes. c-When does he go? He goes on the weekend. d-Who does he usually go with? He usually goes with two friends. e-Where does he often go? He often goes walking in the mountains. f-What do they take? They always take food, water and a camping stove. 3-Practise listening picture. a b c d e. always. usually. often. somet imes. never. v v v v v. Writing At the weekend I usually go camping in the countryside …………………………............ …………………………………………........ Lan and Nga never go camping. They sometimes go to the zoo. They often go jogging. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... Page 155 Planning date:March 4th 2012. Teaching date:March 6th 2012. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 13 ACTIVITIES AND SEASONS Week 28 Period 79 THE WEATHER AND SEASONS ( A1-A2).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span> I-OBJECTIVE Temperature and seasons vocabulary with “ what is the weather like ? ” to talk about the weather in each season. Vocabulary spring, summer, fall, winter, hot, cold …………. Structure What is the weather like in the summer? It is hot. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette and table for activity 1 Students:pictures for activity 1. III-PROCEDURE. TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Ask studens to read the text on page 132 again and then answer all questions follow. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, new structure and help them practise using new words Pre-teach vocabulary The seasons ( n )-mùa The spring ( n )-mùa xuân The summer ( n )-mùa hạ The fall ( n )-mùa thu The winter ( n )-mùa đông The weather ( n )-thời tiết Warm ( adj )-ấm Cold ( adj )-lạnh Hot ( adj )-nóng Cool ( adj )-mát Matching. Model sentences 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise asking and answering about the weather Picture drill Ask students to look at the pictures on page 134. Ask and answer questions about the weather.. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise talking about the. CONTENT Speaking …………………………………………....... …………………………………………....... …………………………………………........ 1-New words The seasons ( n ) The spring ( n ) The summer ( n ) The fall ( n ) The winter ( n ) The weather ( n ) Warm ( adj ) Cold ( adj ) Hot ( adj ) Cool ( adj ) 2-Matching June, July, August Cold Spring September, October, Cool Summer November Warm Fall December, January, Hot winter February March, April, May 3-Grammar structure What is the weather like in the summer? It is hot. Practise speaking S1: What is the weather like in the winter? S2:It is cold. S3: What is the weather like in the fall? S4: It is cool. Page 156 …………………………………………........ ………………………………………….........

<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span> season and weather. Ask students to work in groups ( one for Speaking each season ) and each group makes a poster. rice hot and mountain green river the night morning warm yellow is beautiful cold evening cool trees blue weather gray hot flowers afternoon house tall very Group A in the spring The afternoon is warm but the evening is cool. The rice is green. The trees are beautiful.. …………………………………………........ 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) …………………………………………........ At home do exercise 1-2 on page 108 workbook. Exercise 1: Match the adjectives with the seasons. Then make up sentences about the weather. ………………………………………............ Exercise 2: Read. Then write. ………………………………………............ ………………………………………............. Page 157 Planning date:March 5th 2012. Teaching date:March 7th 2012. Total: ………... Absentees: ………………………… UNIT 13 ACTIVITIES AND SEASONS Week 28 Period 80 THE WEATHER AND SEASONS ( A3-A4).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span> I-OBJECTIVE “What weather do you like ?” to talk about your favourite weather and contrast it with “ What is the weather like ?”. Use “ when “ clauses in positive statements and “ what “ questions. Vocabulary all words in part A ( revision ) Structure What weather do you like? I like hot weather. What do you do when it is hot? I go fishing. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette for activity 3 Students:picture for activity 3, 4 III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 mionutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students to look at the pictures on page a-What is the weather like in the fall? 134 for one minute. Ask them. …………………………………………........ b- What is the weather like in the winter? …………………………………………........ 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give the form of when-clause and help studenst distinguish “What weather do you like ?”, “ What is the weather like ?”. Model sentence 1-Grammar structure What weather do you like? I like hot weather. What is the weather like to day? It is cold very cold. Predict 2-Prediction What does Ba do when it is…………….. What does Ba do when it is hot? a-hot ? He plays badminton. b-cold ? c-cool ? d-warm ? Model sentence 3-Grammar structure What does he do when it is hot? do you He goes swimming. I watch TV. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise asking and answering with “ What weather do you like?”, “ What is the weather like ?”, making sentences with when-clause Picture drill ( A3-page 135 ). Practise speaking S1: What the weather do they like ? Page 158 S2: They like cold weather. S3: What the weather does she like ? S4: She likes cool weather. S5: What the weather do they like ?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span> Word cue drill a-cold / go jogging ? b-cool / do aerobic ? c-hot / go swimming ? d-warm / go to the park ? 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise speaking Mapped dialogue A B Can Tho Ha Noi ......Ha Noi ….cold .....Can Tho ? ……hot ……like? ……cold …...Ha Noi …like ……hot …Can Tho Ask students to write five sentences about themselves.. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 3, 4 on page 109 workbook. Exercise 3: Look at the pictures. What weather do they like? Write four sentences under the pictures Exercise 4: Answer.. S6: They like warm weather. Speaking S1: When it is cold, do you go jogging? S2: Yes, I do …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………....... 1-Speaking A: What’s the weather like in Ha Noi? B: It is cold. What’ the weather like in Can Tho? A: It is hot. B: What weather do you like ? A: I like cold weather. B: Come to Ha Noi. A: What weather do you like ? B: I like hot weather. A: Come to Can Tho.. 2-Writing Ex: When it is warm I go fishing. When it is cool we play football. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... Page 159 Planning date:March 11th 2012. Teaching date:March 13th 2012. Total: ………. Absentees: ……………………. UNIT 13 ACTIVITIES AND SEASONS Week 29 Period 81 ACTIVITIES IN SEASONS ( B1 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span> I-OBJECTIVE Further practice in adverbs of frequency, simple present, sports vocabulary, season to talk about sports in each season. Vocabulary go sailing, play basketball Structure We often play voleyball in the spring. II-PREPARATION Teacher:pictures and cassette for activity 1 Students:pictures for activity 1 III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Matching Matching Ask students to do the matching. vv vv x vvv vvv 2-PRESENTATION ( 10 minutes ) always usually often sometimes -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words To play basketball ( v )-chơi bóng rổ To play basketball ( v ) To go swimming ( v )-đi bơi To go swimming ( v ) To go sailing ( v )-đi bơi thuyền To go sailing ( v ) To play badminton ( v )-chơi cầu lông To play badminton ( v ) To play volleyball ( v )-chơi bóng truyền To play volleyball ( v ) Ask students to give the use of adverbs of 2-Grammar structure frequency. adverbs of frequency are normally placed. -after the simple tenses of to be. -before the simple tenses of all other verbs. -with compound tenses, they are placed after the first auxiliary, or , with interrogative verbs, after auxiliary + subject. He is never on time. We always play basketball in the winter. Ask students to listen to the tape while 3-Practise listening and reading reading. ( B1-page 138 ). Students read. ........................................................................ 3-PRACTICE ( 15 minutes ) -To help students practise using adverbs of frequency, simple present, sports vocabulary and season Ask students to make questions for each a Practise speaking answer below. a-We often play volleyball. What do you do in the spring? b-They sometimes go sailing. What do they do in the fall? c-I often go swimming. What do you do in the summer? d-She usually plays badminton. What does she do in the fall?. Page 160 e-We always play basketball. Ask students to use the questions and answers to practise.. What do you do in the winter? S1: What do you do in the spring? S2: We often play volleyball. ………………………………………….........

<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span> …………………………………………........ 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise writing about themselves Write it up Ask students to write the things they often do in each season. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1, 2 on page 110-111 workbook. Exercise 1: Complete the sentences. Exercise 2: Check how often you do these things in different seasons. Then answer the questions in full sentences.. Practise writing I sometimes go fishing in the spring. I always go swimming in the summer. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... Page 161 th. Planning date:March 13 2012. Teaching date:March 15th 2012. Total: ………. Absentees: ……………………… UNIT 13 ACTIVITIES AND SEASONS Week 29 Period 82 ACTIVITIES IN SEASONS ( B2 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write about activities they do in different seasons. Vocabulary all words in unit 12 ( revision ) Structure What do you do in the spring? I always ride my bike. II-PREPARATION Teacher:pictures for activity 2 Students:paper to write in groups III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students. What do you often do in the spring? the summer? the fall? and in the winter? 2-PRE-WRITING ( 15 minutes ) -To give students how to write. Brainstorm Speaking ACTIVITIE AND SEASONS usually winter sometimes wear warm clothes go for a walk stay at home play basketball watch TV go jogging usually summer sometimes play in the park go sailing go swimming fly my kite eat fruit go camping S1: What do you often do in the summer? Board drill ( B 2 page 139 ) S2: I usually play in the park. S3: What do you often do in the winter? Survey S4: I sometimes go for a walk. na sea wea usu usu usu me son ther ally ally ally go do eat or dri nk Hoai fall cool the go a mou cam pic nta ping nic in hot dri nk. Page 162 S1:Which season do you like? S2: Fall. S1:What ‘s the weather like in the fall?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span> S2: It is cool. S1: Where do you usually go? S2: To the mountains. S1: What do you usually do there? S2: I go camping with my friends. S1: What do you usually eat or drink? S2: We usually take a picnic and drink a lot of hot drink. 3-WHILE-WRITING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise writing Write it up Practise writing Ask students to write about their friends they Hoai likes the fall when the weather is cool. have interviewed, using 3 rd person singular. She usually goes camping in the mountains with her friends. They take a picnic and a lot of hot drinks. 4-POST-WRITING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students correct their writing Sharing the idea anh correct error Ask some students to present their writing in …………………………………………........ front of the class. …………………………………………........ Correct mistake if having. …………………………………………........ 5-HOME-WORK At home do exercises 3 on page 113. Exercise 3: Make a lists of things you do in …………………………………………........ different seasons. …………………………………………......... Page 163 th. Planning date:March 17 2012. Teaching date:March 19th 2012. Total:………. Absentees: ………………… UNIT 14 MAKING PLANS.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span> Week 30 Period 83 VACATIONS DESTINATIONS ( A1-A3 ) I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson,students will be able to use “ going to “ future, positive statements and “ Wh “-question to talk about vacation plans. Vocabulary vacation, aunt, uncle, to visit, the citadel Structure What are you going to do this summer vacation? I am going to visit Hue. II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette and picture for activity 1, 3 Students:paper to write in groups III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students. What do you often do in the summer vacation? I often play soccer. I sometimes go swimming. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, the form to talk about the future plan Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words The summer vacation ( n )-kì nghỉ hè The summer vacation ( n ) The citadel ( n )- cố đô The citadel ( n ) To stay with ( v )-ở với To stay with ( v ) To stay for ( v )-ở trong thời gian To stay for ( v ) My uncle ( n )-bác tôi My uncle ( n ) My aunt ( n )-cô tôi My aunt ( n ) To visit ( v )-thăm To visit ( v ) Presentation dialogue Model sentences 2-Grammar structure To be going to do smt. What are you going to do? is she I am going to visit Hue. She is going to stay for a week. We use this form for intention. Comprehension question 3-Question and answer a-What is Lan going to do? She is going to visit Hue. b-Where is she going to stay ? She is going to stay with her aunt and uncle. c-How long is she going to stay? She is going to stay for a week. Page 164 d-What is she going to do? She is going to visit Hue..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span> 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise making sentences using be-going to do. Word cue drill a-visit Hue b-visit the citadel c-stay in a hotel d-visit Bach Ma e-camp in the mountain. f-stay in a tent.. Practise speaking S1: What are you going to do this summer vacation ? S2: I am going to visit Hue. S3: Where are you going to stay ? S4: I am going to stay in a hotel. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise speaking about the intension Find someone who……. Speaking and writing “ This summer vacation “ Find someone who………… name ……………….stay at home. ………visit an aunt or uncle. …………….visit a new city. ……….......... stay in a hotel. ……..camp in the mountains ……….............stay in a tent. Ex: This summer vacation, are you going to stay at home? Yes, I am / No, I am not. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1, 2 on page 114-115 workbook. …………………………………………........ Exercise 1: Complete the dialogue. …………………………………………........ Exercise 2: Match the answers to the …………………………………………........ questions.. Page 165 th. Planning date:March 18 2012. Teaching date:March 20th 2012. Total: ……….... Absentees: ………………… UNIT 14 MAKING PLANS.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span> Week 30 Period 84 VACATIONS DESTINATIONS ( A4-A5 ) I-OBJECTIVE Reading a text about vacation plans to understand and the details and practise “ going to “ future and sequencing words: first, then, next, after that, finaly. Vocabulary first, then, next, after that, finaly Structure the form be going to II-PREPARATION Teacher: pictures and cassette for activity 4 Students:paper to do exercise in groups III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students. What are you going to do next Sunday? …………………………………………........ Where are you going to go next Sunday? …………………………………………........ 2-PRE-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, help them predict the content of the text. Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words the beach ( n )-bãi biển the beach ( n ) a temple ( n )-chùa a temple ( n ) Matching 2-Matching Picture 1 Ben Thanh Nha Trang market HCM city 2 The beach Ha Noi 3 The Citadel Quang Ninh Ngoc Son Hue 4 temple 5 Ha Long bay Ordering 3-Orderring Phuong and Mai are going to visit the five 1…………………………………………...... places you’ve matched in their Summer 2……………………………………….......... vacation. Where are they going to go first? 3…………………………………………...... Second? Third? Fourth? Fifth? With a 4…………………………………………...... partner, discuss the order you think. 5…………………………………………...... 3-WHILE-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise reading Ask students to listen to the tape while 1-Practise listening and reading reading the text. ........................................................................ Ask them to read the text once more and 2-Checking the order then check their order, and fill in the correct Places Where How What order in column one of the Grid to to long? to do? visit stay? Page166 below. First Ha Then Long.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span> Next After that Fina lly. 4-POST-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To check students’understand Ask students. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 3 on page 114 workbook. Exercise 3: Write your own plan for this summer vacation. Answer the question.. bay Ha Noi Hue Nha Trang HCM city. Which place are Phuong and Mai going to visit first? They are going to visit Ha Long bay first. Where are they going to stay? They are going to stay with their uncle and aunt. Question and answer Which places are you going to visit in this summer vacation? …………………………………………........ -Where are you going to stay? …………………………………………........ -How long are you going to stay for? …………………………………………........ -What are you going to do there? …………………………………………......... …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... Page 167 Planning date:March 29th 2012. Teaching date:March 21st 2012. Total: ………...... Absentees: ………………… UNIT 14 MAKING PLANS.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span> Week 30 Period 85: FREE TIME FOR PLANS ( B1-B3 ) I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about plans for the near future. Vocabulary visit a friend, see a movie, help mon ..... Structure the be going to ( revision ) II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette for activity 1, 3 Students: form of the be going to….. on a paper III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Finding friends ho my a so a bad my S1: What are you going to do tomorrow? me fri ccer mo mi mo S2:I am going to do my homework. wo end mat vie nt m rk see play do visit help go watch. 2-PRESENTATION ( 10 minutes ) -To give students the form and how to use of the be going. Pre-teach grammar. 3-PRACTICE ( 15 minutes ) -To help students practise the be going to do smt for intention Predict dialogue ( B 1 page 114 ). v. ch v. wal ki ng. on v. v v. v v. v v v v. v. Grammar structure The be going to form Subject + am / is / are + going + the full infinitive: We use this form to express the subject’s intention to perform a certain future action. Ex: I am going to do my homework next Sunday. My mother is going to visit her friend tomorrow. My chidren are going to play tennis next Monday.. 1-Speaking Tuan:What are you going to do tonight? Lan: I am going to …………………..…..... Tuan:What are you going to do tomorrow? Lan: It’s Sunday. I am going to ….... Then we we’re going to ………….. What Page 168 about you? Tuan: Tonight, I’m going to ……………...... Tomorrow, I’m going to …………......

<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span> Mapped dialogue ( B 2 page 144 ) …..…….tonight?. ….…see a movie ……….to noght?. .….help my mom ….…..tomorrow? ……go walking. ……tomorrow? ….play volleyball Ask students to listen to the tape while reading ( B 3-page 144 ) 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise writing Write it up Ask students to write five sentences about their plan they are going to do next Sunday.. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise in part 4 –page 145 Tieng Anh 6.. S1: What are you going to do tonight? S2: I am going to see a movie. What are you going to do tonight? S1: I am going to help my mom. What are you going to do tomorrow? S2: I am going to go walking. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ 2-Practise listening and reading Students read the dialogue in chorus. …………………………………………........ ........................................................................ Writing I am going to go fishing. I am going to play football with my old friends. I am going to help my mom to clean my house. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ Answer. Then write the answers in your exercise notebook. What are you going to do on the weekend? …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... Page 169 th. Planning date:March 24 2012. Teaching date:March 26th 2012. Total: ………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 14 MAKING PLANS.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span> Week 31 Period 86 FREE TIME FOR PLANS ( B5-B6 ) I-OBJECTIVE Further listening and reading practice with “ going to “ and by the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about plans for the near future. Vocabulary to bring a camera, to take a photo Structure the be going to form ( revision ) II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette and picture for activity 6 Students: paper to do exercise in groups. III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To lead students into the new lesson Survey S1: What are you going to do tonight? S2: I am going to watch TV. S3: What is Hoa going to do on Saturday? S4: She is going to do her homework. 2-PRE-READING / LISTENING ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, predict what Vui and her friends going to bring when they go camping. Pre-reading Pre-teach vocabulary To bring ( v )-mang A camera ( n )-máy ảnh, máy quay phim To take a photo ( v )-chụp ảnh Pre-questions. Pre-listening Brainstorm. Ask students predict what Vui and her friends going to bring.. CONTENT Speaking tonight. Me. on Satur day. on Sun day. in the summer vacation. watch TV. Hoa Lan. 1-New words To bring ( v ) A camera ( n ) To take a photo ( v ) 2-Question and answer Minh and his friends are going to have a picnic. a-Where are they going to have a picnic? …………………………………………........ b-What three things are they going to bring? …………………………………………........ c-What are they going to do there? …………………………………………........ 3-Speaking Things to bring for a camping vacation -a kite -warm clothes -a tent -food Page 170 4-Prediction Vui A ball Ly A camera Lan Some food.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span> Mai Nga 3-WHILE-READING / LISTENING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise reading and listening While-reading Ask students to listen to the tape while reading. Ask them to read the text again and then check their predicted answers. While-listening Ask students to listen to the tape and check their prediction.. 4-POST-READING / LISTENING ( 10 minutes ) -To check students’ understand Post-reading Ask students to talk about what they are going to do this weekend.. Post-listening Ask students to write about the five girls.. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 2 on page 115 workbook.. Some drinks A tent. 1-Practise reading a-They are going to have a picnic near a lake. b-They are going to bring a camera, food and drink. c-They are going to take photos. 2-Practise listening Vui Ly Lan Mai Nga. A ball A camera Some food Some drinks A tent. 1-Speaking -We are going to have a picnic in Yen Bai park this weekend. -I am going to bring a tent. -I am going to bring some food and some drink. …………………………………………........ 2-Writing Vui is going to bring a tent and some food. Ly is going to bring a camera. Lan is going to bring a ball. Mai and Lan are going to bring some drinks. Exercise 2: Write sentences about Hoa’s tomorrow plan. Use be going to.. Page 171 th. Planning date:March 25 2012. Teaching date:March 27th 2012. Total:……….... Absentees: …………………… UNIT 14 MAKING PLANS Week 31 Period 87 SUGGESTIONS ( C1 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to make suggestions with “Let’s ....... / Why don’t we ……..? / What about ……….? ” and responding. Vocabulary a suggestion, a good idea Structure Let’s go to the zoo. What about going to the zoo? Why don’t we go to the zoo? That’s a good idea. / No, I don’t want. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassettte, form of suggestions with let’s../ what about…? /Why don’t we…? Students:paper to do exercises in groups. III-PROCEDURE. TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To lead students into the new lesson Ask students to look at the picture on page 147 and answer the questions.. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words, the form to suggest Pre-teach vocabulary A pagoda ( n )-đền thờ A minibus ( n )-xe buýt loại nhỏ Too ( adv )-quá Too far (adj-ph )-quá xa Pre-question Ask students to look at the dialogue on page 147. Read and then answer the questions. Model sentences How to suggest someone doing something. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ). CONTENT Speaking a-How many students are there in the picture? …………………………………………........ b-Who are they? …………………………………………........ c-Where are they? …………………………………………........ d-What are they doing? …………………………………………........ e-What are they talking about? …………………………………………......... 1-New words A pagoda ( n ) A minibus ( n ) Too ( adv ) Too far (adj-ph ) 2-question and answer a-Where are they going to go ? They are going to go to Huong pagoda. b-How are they going to travel ? They are going to travel by minibus. 3-Grammar structure -( suggestion ) Let’s + bare-infinitive. -( responding ) That is a good idea No. I don’t want. ( let’s = let us ) Ex: Let’s go camping. That is a good idea. Let’s walk there. No. I don’t want to. -What about + V-ing……………? Page 172 Ex: What about going camping? -Why don’t we + verb ( without to )…...? Ex: Why don’t we walk there?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span> -To help students practise making suggestions Word drill a-play video games b-go jogging c-listen to music. Speaking a-play video games -Let’s play video games. -What about playing videogame? -Why don’t we play video games? b-go jogging -Let’s going jogging. -What about going jogging? -Why don’t we go jogging? …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise how to suggest by themselves. Match the suggestions to the right situations. situations 1-I feel hungry now. 2-I can’t study. It’s noisy outside. 3-We’ll have 3 days off this weekend. 4-I like tennis. But I don’t know how to play.. suggestions a-Let’s go to the beach and have a good time ther. b-What about joining the sports club? c-Why don’t you take some milk? d-Why don’t you go to the library? 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 3-page 117 workbook.. Speaking S1: I feel hungry now. S2: Why don’t you take some milk? S3: I can’t study. It’s noisy outside. S4: Why don’t you go to the library? …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... Exercise 3: Make suggestions. Using Let’s, what about or why don’t you and the ideas in the box.. Page 173 Planning date:March 26th 2012. Teaching date:March 28th 2012. Total:....……...Absentees:…………………….. UNIT 14 MAKING PLANS Week 31 Period 88 SUGGESTIONS ( C2-C3 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to express what they want to do and what they don’t want to do. Vocabulary to want, go to the beach, visit the museum Structure What does Lan want to do? She wants to read book. Why do they not want to walk? Because it is too hot. II-PREPARATION Teacher: pictures for activity 3 Students: review how to make suggestions III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND CONTENT STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 10 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Speaking Ask students to look at the pictures in Picture 1 activity 3-page 148-149 Tieng Anh 6 and -Let’s go to the beach. make suggestions. -Why don’t we go to the beach? -What about going to the beach? Picture b -Let’s go to the museum. -What about going to the museum? -Why don’t we go to the museum? …………………………………………........ …………………………………………....... 2-PRESENTATION ( 10 minutes ) -To give students how to use “ the verb to Grammar structure ( revision ) want ” What do you / they want? does he / she want? I / we / they + want + noun. She / he + wants + noun. What do you / they want to do ? does he / she want to do? I / we / they + want + to-infinitive ……. She / he + wants + to-infinitive ……….. Example What does she want? She wants a book. What do they want? They want tea. What do you want to do? I want to read book. What does he want to do? He wants to watch TV. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise using “ want to do smt “ Ask students to read the dialogue on page 1-Practise reading 147 again. Then answer the questions. ........................................................................ 2-Question and answer Page 174 a-What does Nam want to do? He wants to go to Hue. b-What does Nga want to do? She wants to go to Huong pagoda..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span> c-How does Lan want to travel? She wants to walk there. d-Why doesn’t Nam want to walk? He doesn’t want to walk because it is too far. e-How does he want to travel? He wants to travel by bike. f-Why doesn’t Nga want to go by bike? She doesn’t want to go by bike because it is too hot. g-How does Ba want to travel? He wants to travel by minibus. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise by themselves Chain game Ask students to play a game.. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 2-page 117 workbook.. Speaking S1: I want to play soccer. S2: You want to play soccer. I want to read book. S3: She wants to play soccer. You want to read books. I want to watch TV. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ Exercise 2: Complete the dialogue. Use what about / let’s / why don’t we………... Page 175 Planning date:April 1st 2012. Teaching date:April 2nd 2012. Week 32 PERIOD 89 I-OBJECTIVE. Total: ............. Absentees: …………………… GRAMMAR PRACTICE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span> Further practice in present simple, adverbs of frequency, present progressive, “ going to “ future, the weather. Vocabulary adverb of frequency ( revision ) Structure present simple, present progressive, “ going to “ future II-PREPARATION Teacher:tables for activity 1, 2 Students:doing all exercises in grammar practice before class. III-PROCEDURE. TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Ask students to do grammar paractice 1. A: …… you like sports? B: Yes. I ……. sports. A: What …… you play? B: I …… badminton. A: …… you play volleyball? B: No, I …….. CONTENT. Speaking Complete the sentences ( using the verb or the auxiliary verb in the present simple ) A: Do you like sports? B: Yes. I like sports. A: What do you you play? B: I play badminton. A: Do you play volleyball? B: No, I don’t. …………………………………………............. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) Grammar structure -To help students remember the form and how to S + V-( s / es ) + ………………………... use present simple, adverbs of frequency, present S + don’t / doesn’t + V + ………………. progressive, “ going to “ future. Do / does + S + V + ……………………? Grammar practice 1-2 ( revision ) Yes + S + do / does / No + S + don’t doesn’t. Ask students to give the form anh how to use of -used to express habitual actions. the simple present tense -used with adverb of frequence to answer the question “ how often….” Grammar practice 3 ( revision ) Ask students to give the form anh how to use of S + am / is / are + V-ing………………… the present continuous tense. S + am not / is not / are not + V-ing…..... Is / are + S + V-ing…………………...? Yes + S + am / is / are. No + S + am not / is not / are not. -used to express an action happening now. Grammar practice 4 ( revision ) Ask students to give the form anh how to use of S + am / is / are + going to do smt. the be-going to ……. -used to express the subject’s intention to perform a certain future action. 3-PRACTICE ( 15 minutes ) -To help students practise using the present Practise speaking simple, adverbs of frequency, present progressive, 1-Grammar practice 1 “ going to “ future. A: Does he like sports? Grammar practice 1-2 B: Yes, he does. He likes sports. Ask students to do language focus 1, 2. A: What does he play? A: …… he like sports? B: He plays soccer. B: Yes, he …… He …….. sports. A: Does he play tennis? A: What …….. he play? B: No, he doesn’t. B: He ……. Soccer. ………………………………………….............. A: …….. he play tennis? ………………………………………….............. B: No, he ………. Page 176 Noughts and crosses TV? the movies? swimming? your mom? table tennis? camping?. the store? fishing? badminton?. 2-Grammar practice 2 S1: How often do you watch TV? S2: I always watch TV in the evening. S3: How often do you go to the movie?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span> Grammar practice 3 ( gap fill ). Grammar practice 4: Future: going to Picture dril. Ask students to complete the dialogue on page 152 and then answer the three questions.. 4-PRODUCTION ( 7 minutes ) -To help students distinguish the three tenses they have just reviewed Give the correct form of each verb in brackets 1-You can ( park ) …… here because this sign says “ parking “ 2-Mary ( not work ) …… today because it is Sunday. 3-Where … you ( go ) …..? I ( go ) …. to the zoo. 4-What …. you ( do ) …… this summer holiday? We ( visit ) ………… President Ho Chi Minh’s Mausolium. 5-My brother ( drive ) …… his car into the garage at the moment. 6-You mustn’t ( eat ) …… food in the classroom. 7-Let’s ( help ) …… Mom, Lan. She ( clean ) ……… the floor. 5-HOME-WORK ( 3 minutes ) At home do grammar practice 5, 6 - page 153 Tieng Anh 6.. S4: I sometimes go to the movie. ………………………………………….............. 3-Grammar practice 3 Hung: What are you watching? Mai: I am watching this TV sports show. Hung: What are they playing? Mai: They are playing soccer. Hung: Who is winning? Mai: My favorite team is winning the match. ………………………………………….............. 4-Grammar practice 4 Picture a: What are they going to do ? They are going to play football. Picture b: What are they going to do? They are going to play tennis. ………………………………………….............. Han: What are you going to do ? Vui: I am going to visit Ha Noi. Han: Where are you going to stay? Vui: I am going to stay in a hotel. Han: How long are you going to stay? Vui: I am going to stay for a week. a-What is Vui going to do? She is going to visit Ha Noi. b-Where is she is going to stay? She is going to stay in a hotel. c-How long is she going to stay? She is going to stay for a week. Practise writing 1-You can ( park ) park here because this sign says “ parking “ 2-Mary ( not work ) is not working today because it is Sunday. 3-Where are you ( go ) going ? I ( go ) am going to the zoo. 4-What are you ( do ) going to do this summer holiday? We ( visit ) are going to visit President Ho Chi Ming’s Mausolium. 5-My brother ( drive ) is driving his car into the garage at the moment. 6-You mustn’t ( eat ) eat food in the classroom. 7-Let’s ( help ) help Mom, Lan. She ( clean ) is cleaning the floor. Grammar practice 5: What is the weather like? ( answer the question about the weather in your home town ). Grammar practice 6: Future plans. Page 177 st. Planning date:April 1 2012. Testing date: April 3rd 2012. Week 32 Period 90 I-OBJECTIVE. Total: ............. Absentees: ……………………… WRITTEN TEST 5.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span> Themes / topics: Recreation ( sports and past time, seasons and plans ) Language focus: Vocabulary ( words for name of sports and pastime activities, words to talk about seasons and the weather) Grammar structures: Present simple and present continuous tense, what-questions, adverbs of frequency, adjective for weather, preposition of position , the be going to, suggestion with let, what about and why don’t we….) II-PREPARATION Teacher: Photocopy paper tests Students:Review from unit 12 to unit 14 :Vocabulary ( words for name of sports and pastime activities, words to talk about seasons and the weather) Grammar structures: Present simple and present continuous tense, what-questions, adverbs of frequency, adjective for weather, preposition of position , the be going to, suggestion with let, what about and why don’t we….) Tên / Chủ đề Nội dung Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Cộng Recreation cần kiểm tra Cấp độ Cấp độ sport and thấp cao pastime season, plan I-Listening Số câu : 7 -Listen for Adverb of Số câu: 2 Số điểm:2,5 specific frequency Số điểm: 1 information -Phonetic /  / , /  /, / Số câu : 5 25 % i / , /  /, /  / Số điểm:1,5 II-Reading weather and Số câu : 4 Số câu : 1 Số câu : 5 -Question and seasons Số điểm: 2 Số điểm: 0,5 Số điểm:2,5 answer 25 % III-Language the simple, Số câu : 3 Số câu : 7 focus present Số điểm: 1,5 Số điểm:2,5 -Correct form progressive of the verb tense, future plan -Vocabulary words for Số câu: 4 25 % season, adv of Số điểm:1 fre IV-Writing Use there are.. Số câu:6 Số câu : 6 -Rewiting What about + Số điểm: Số điểm:2,5 v-ing ? 2,5 -Writing a Use the passage suggestions to 25 % write about your summer holiday Tổng số: Số câu : 11 Số câu : 8 Số câu: 6 Số câu : 25 100 % Số điểm:4,5 Số điểm: 3 Số điểm: Số điểm:10 2,5 Page 178 Full name:…………………… Class 6 ENGLISH WRITTEN TEST NUMBER 5 I-Listening / Phonetic Question I: Listen and complete these sentences below. ( 1 point ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span> 1-We ................. play volleyball in the spring. 2-They .................... go sailing in the fall. Question II- Circle the odd one out ( 1,5 point ). 3. a. small b. face c. grade d. late 4. a. breakfast b. teacher c. ready d. heavy 5. a. time b. fine c. five d. city 6. a. engineer b. greeting c. teeth d. street 7. a.usually b.ready c.my e.very II-Read the passage and then answer the questions given. ( 2,5 points ) There are four seasons in a year in our country. They are spring, summer, fall and winter. In the spring, the weather is usually warm. Sometimes it is cold, but not very cold. There are many flowers in this season. After spring, it is the summer. In the summer, the days are long and the nights are short. We often go on vacation in the summer. Fall is a nice season. The weather is often cool. In the winter, it is usually very cold. The days are short and the nights are long. We always wear warm clothes in the winter. 8-How many seasons are there in your country? What are they? ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 9-What are there in the spring?……………………………………………………………….. 10-What do you often do in the summer?…………………………………………………….. 11-What is the weather like in the fall ?………………………………………………………. 12-Are the days long or short in the winter?.........……………………………………………. III-Language focus Question I: Use the correct tense or form of the verb in brackets ( 1,5 points ). 13-My brother ( drive )……………………….. his car into the garage at the moment. 14-My brother and I ( visit ) ……………………….. our grandmother on the weekend. 15-She ( not do ) …………………. her home work in the evenings. Question II:Choose the best answer to complete these sentences ( 1 point ). 16-Fall means ……….. in British-English. a. summer b. winter c. autumn d. spring 17-What does Lien do when …………. warm? a. there’s b. it’s c. its d. they’re 18-Tuan ................ goes swimming in the winter because it is very cold. a. always b. often c. usually d. never 19-How often do you do morning exercises in the summer? a. I sometimes do b. Yes, I do c. I like it d. I play soccer IV-Writing Question I: Read the first sentence , and then complete the second sentence with the same meaning.( 0,5 point ) 20-Let’s go to the cinema. What ......................................................................... 21-This room has twenty tables. There are ................................................................. Question II:Write about your plan for a summer holiday. Use these suggestions.(2 points) First: visit Ha Noi / 3 days / kim Lien hotel Then: visit Ha Lon Bay / 2 days / friend’s house Next: visit Hue citadel / uncle and aunt Finally: visit Ho Chi Minh city / a week / grandparents / Nha Rong harbor .................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................. Page 179 Planning date:April 2nd 2012. Teaching date:April 4th 2012. Total: .............. Absentees: ……………….... Week 32 Period 91 CORRECTING THE TEST 5 I-OBJECTIVE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span> Teacher gives opinions about the students’ knowledge. There are some main knowledge you don’t understand perfectly such as how to write sentences ( using the words or phrases given, the tenses ………… II-PREPARATION Teacher comments. -listening skill is very bad. -reading skill is good. Most of all students get good marks in this part -writing skill needs to be improved more and more. -there are many mistakes when you do language focus test. III-CONTENT The test is not very difficult, the instruction is clear. We study all in unit 12, 13, 14. I-Listening / Phonetic : Question I : 1 point ( each correct word got 0.5 point ). Question II: 1,5 point (correct word got 0.3 point ) II-Reading : 2,5 points ( each correct answer got 0.5 point ). III-Language focus Question I: 1,5 point ( each correct answer got 0.5 point ). Question II: 1 point ( each correct word or phrase got 0.25 point ). IV-Writing Question I: 0,5 point ( each correct answer got 0.25 point ) Question II: 2 points ( each correct sentence got 0.5 point ). I-Listening / Phonetic Question I: Listen and complete these sentences below. 1-We often play volleyball in the spring. 2-They sometimes go sailing in the fall. All of you do this test very well Question II- Circle the odd one out 3. a. small b. face c. grade d. late 4. a. breakfast b. teacher c. ready d. heavy 5. a. time b. fine c. five d. city 6. a. engineer b. greeting c. teeth d. street 7. a.usually b.ready c.my e.very Most of you get good marks in this test. II-Reading test 8-How many seasons are there in your country? What are they There are four seasons in a year in our country. They are spring, summer, fall and winter 9-What are there in the spring? There are many flowers in this season. 10-What do you often do in the summer? We often go on vacation in the summer. 11-What is the weather like in the fall ? The weather is often cool. 12-Are the days long or short in the winter? The days are short. Notice how to answer question 5: Are the days long or short in the winter? You have to answer the days are short if the text says like this or the days are long if the text says like that Page 180 III-Language focus Question I: Use the correct tense or form of the verb in brackets ( 1,5 points ). 13-My brother ( drive ) is driving his car into the garage at the moment. 14-My brother and I ( visit ) are going to visit our grandmother on the weekend..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(181)</span> 15-She ( not do ) does not do her home work in the evenings. Many students do this test badly. You don’t remember the form for each tense so you got many mistakes. Remember: The present continuous tense S + am / is / are + V-ing. ( verb ends in a single e the e is dropped before ing ) The be going to form ( S + am / is / are + going to do smt ) The simple present( negative ) S + don’t / doesn’t + bare-infinitive ) Question II:Choose the best answer to complete these sentences ( 1 point ). 16-Fall means ……….. in British-English. a. summer b. winter c. autumn d. spring 17-What does Lien do when …………. warm? a. there’s b. it’s c. its d. they’re 18-Tuan ................ goes swimming in the winter because it is very cold. a. always b. often c. usually d. never 19-How often do you do morning exercises in the summer? a. I sometimes do b. Yes, I do c. I like it d. I play soccer Notice: Fall is in American English, autumn is in British-English. It is = it’s ( the short form ) IV-Wtriting Question I: Read the first sentence , and then complete the second sentence with the same meaning.( 0,5 point ) 20-Let’s go to the cinema. What about going to the cinema? 21-This room has twenty tables. There are twenty tables in this room. We have three ways to suggest. Let’s + bare-inf What about + V-ing ? Why don’t we + bare –inf ...? Let’s go to the cinema = what about going to the cinema? = why don’t we go to the cinema? Question II:Write about your plan for a summer holiday. Use these suggestions.(2 points) First: visit Ha Noi / 3 days / Kim Lien hotel Then: visit Ha Lon Bay / 2 days / friend’s house Next: visit Hue citadel / uncle and aunt Finally: visit Ho Chi Minh city / a week / grandparents / Nha Rong harbor I am going on vacation this summer. First I am going to visit Ha Noi for three days. I’m going to stay at Kim Lien hotel. Then I am going to visit Ha Lon Bay for two days and stay in my friend’s house Next I am going to visit Hue citadel and stay in my uncle and aunt’s house. Finally I am going to visit Ho Chi Minh city for a week. I am going to visit grandparents, too. I am going to see Nha Rong harbor. SỒ BÀI KT 37 SỐ ĐIỂM %. ĐIỂM GIỎI 8-10. RESULT TABLE ĐIỂM KHÁ ĐIỂM TB 7-8 5-6. ĐIỂM YẾU 3-4. ĐIỂM KÉM 1-2. Page 181 th. Planning date:April 7 2012. Teaching date:April 9th 2012. Total:……….Absentees:…………………… UNIT 15 COUNTRIES Week 33 Period 92 WE ARE THE WORLD ( A1-A3 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(182)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use countries, nationalities and languages vocabulary to talk about where people are from. Vocabulary: the world, Canada, Canadian …………… Structure: Where is he from? He is from China. He is Chinese and he speaks Chinese. II-PREPARATION Teacher: world map, cassette for activity 1, 2, 3 Students:table for activity 3 III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ CONTENT ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) To lead students into the new lesson, to give Speaking them some words about name of countries Ex: Canada over the world. Laos Ask students to look at the world map speak Thailand in English the names of the countries they China know. Vietnam 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) To give students the meaning of new words and how to use them, structure how to ask and answer where people are from. Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words The world ( n )-thế giới The world ( n ) Country ( n )-đất nước, quốc gia Country ( n ) Nationality ( n )-quốc tịch Nationality ( n ) Language ( n )-ngôn ngữ Language ( n ) To speak ( v )-nói To speak ( v ) country nationality language country nationality language Vietnam Vietnamese Vietnamese Vietnam Vietnamese Vietnamese Japan Japanese Japanese Japan Japanese Japanese ………….. ………….. …………... ………….. ………….. …………... Model sentences 2-Grammar structure Where is she from? are you She is from Canada. She is Canadian. She speaks English. I am from Vietnam. I am Vietnamese. I speak Vietnamese. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) To help studenst practise new words and structures they have just learnt. Ask students to listen to the conversation in 1-Practise listening and reading activity 1, 2, 3 while reading. ........................................................................ Page 182 Activity 1: Ask studenst to look at the 2-Practise speaking pictures on page 154. Ask and answer. S1: Where is Marie from? Ex: Where is Loura from ? S2: She is from France. She is from Canada. S3: Where is John from?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(183)</span> Activity 2 and activity 3: Ask students to practise introducing nationality and language. Ex: She is Vietnamese and she speaks Vietnamese.. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) To check students’understand. Ask students to look at the pictures in activity 1-page 154 in one minute then close the books and introduce each person as much as they can. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1, 2 on page 126-127. Exercise 1: Look at the pictures and complete the chart. Exercise 2: Read the chart in exercise 1 again. Answer the reporter’s questions. Then write similar dialogues about Alice, Tim and Kano.. S4: She is from the USA. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ S1: Yoko is Japanese. She speaks Japanese. S2: Lee is Chinese and she speaks Chinese. S3: Susan is British and she speaks English. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ Practise speaking and writing S1: Her name is Laura. She is from Canada. She is Canadian and she can speak English. S2: His name is Lee. He is from China. He is Chinese and he can speak Chinese. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... Page 183 Planning date:April 8th 2012. Teaching date:April 10th 2012. Total:……….Absentees:……………………… UNIT 15 COUNTRIES Week 33 Period 93 WE ARE THE WORLD ( A4-A6 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(184)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer about someone’s nationality, language and where he / she is from they can also write a postcard about being on vacation. Vocabulary: Vietnam---Vietnamese , Australia---Australian----English……. Structure: Where is she from? She is from Vietnam. What is his nationality? He’s Canadian. Which language do they speak? They speak English. II-PREPARATION Teacher: a post card Students: paper to write postcard in groups. III-PROCEDURE. TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Ask students to look at the all pictures on page 154 and introduce some people in it. 2-PRE-SPEAKING / WRITING ( 15 minutes ) -To give students grammar structure and the topic they are going to write. Pre-speaking Review the words for nationality, language and country. country nationality language Japan Japanese Japanese Model sentences Where is he / she from? are they from? He / she is from + ( name of the country ) They are from ……… What is his / her nationality ? He / she is + Japanese / Vietnamese………... Which language does he / she speak? He / she speaks English / Chinese………….. Pre-writing Pre-teach vacabulary a postcard ( n )-bưu thiếp wet ( adj )-ẩm ướt a lot of = many-nhiều interesting place ( n-ph )- địa điểm đẹp Comprehension question (A5 page 156) Ask students to read the postcard and answer the questions. CONTENT Checking the old lesson Her name is Laura. She is from Canada. She is Canadian. She speaks English.. 1-Revision country nationality language Japan Japanese Japanese 2-Grammar structures Where is he / she from? are they from? He / she is from + ( name of the country ) They are from He / she is from Vietnam / Great British…… They are from Canada / Japan…… What is his / her nationality? He / she is + Japanese / Vietnamese…….. Which language does he / she speak? He / she speaks English / Chinese………. 3-New words a postcard ( n )-bưu thiếp wet ( adj )-ẩm ướt a lot of = many-nhiều interesting place ( n-ph )- địa điểm đẹp 4-Question and answer a-Who’s the postcard from? ( Nhan ) b-Where is he ? ( London ) c-What’s the weather like? (cool and wet ) Page 184 d-Is he travelling by train? ( No, by bus ) e-What’s he going to tomorrow? ( visit the Tower of London ) f-Who’s the postcard to ? ( Minh ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(185)</span> Matching Ask students to work in groups to put the words into three columns. Japan Beijing The Statue of Liberty Tokio Vietnam Sydney The US A France The Eiffel Tower The citadel China Bondi beach Paris The Great Wall NewYork Australia Hue Mount Fujiama. 3-WHILE-SPEAKING / WRITING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise using new structures and writing While-speaking Ask studenst to make dialogue. Use the table on activity 3.. While-writing Transformation writing ( A5 page 156 ) Group 1: Postcard from Japan 2: Vietnam 3: The USA 4: China. 4-POST-SPEAKING / WRITING ( 10 minutes ) -To check students’understand and correct mistakes for their writing Post-speaking Ask students to answer the questions in activity 6-page 157 Post-writing Ask each group to present their writing. Teacher listens to them and correct mistakes if having. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 3, 4 on page 128 workbook.. g-Where is he ? ( Hanoi ) 5-Matching country city interesting place Japan Tokyo Mount Fujiama Vietnam Hue The citadel ………. ……….. ………………….... 1-Complete the dialogue Thu: Who is that? Chi: That is Laura. Thu: Where is she from? Chi: She is from Canada. Thu:What is her nationality? Chi: She is Canadian. Thu: Which language does she speak? Chi: She speaks English. 2-Writing Dear Nhan, I am on vacation in Tokyo. The weather is warm and sunny. I am travelling by bus and visiting a lot of interesting places. Tomorrow, I am going to visit Mount Fujiama. Love Minh. 1-Answer the questions ( A 6 ) -What is your name? ……………………………………………… -How old are you? ……………………………………………… 2-Presenting their writing ........................................................................ ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… Exercise 3: Complete the dialogue. Exercise 4: Fill in the reporter’s questions. Page 185. Planning date:April 9th 2012. Teaching date:April 11th 2012. Total: ………. Absentees: ……………....... UNIT 15 COUNTRIES Week 33 Period 94 CITIES, BUILDINGS AND PEOPLE ( B1-B2 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(186)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to compare places, things using comparative and superlative of one syllable Vocabulary: population, building 13.6 million ( thirteen million six hundred ) Structure: Tokyo is smaller than Mexico city. Mexico is the biggest city in the world. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette for activity 1, 2, picture for activity 1 Students:paper to do exercise in groups. III-PROCEDURE. Page 186 + short adj + ER + than + S2 ….. S1 + am is / are Ex: This building is bigger than that one. I am taller than you..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(187)</span> Superlative S + am / is / are + the + short adj + est ......... Ex: I am the tallest student in my class. This house is the smallest of three houses. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise using comparative and superlative of short adjectives Ask students to read the text by themselves and then answer the questions. ( B2-page 159 ). 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise making comparative and superlative. Ask students to write five sentences using comparative and superlative adjectives.. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1, 2 on page 129-130 workbook.. Planning date:April 14th Teaching date:April 16th UNIT 15 Week 34. 1-Reading the text ( B2-page 159 ) …………………………………………….... ……………………………………………… 2-Question and answer a-Is Ha Noi bigger than Ho Chi Minh city? No. HCM city is bigger than Ha Noi. b-Which is the biggest city in the world? Mexico city is the biggest city in the world. c-Which is bigger: London or Tokyo? London is smaller than Tokyo.. Writing sentences Ex: My book is newer than your book. These table are longer than my table. Mai is the tallest student in my class. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ Exercise 1: Complete the sentences. Using bigger, biggest, smaller, smallest. Exercise 2: Fill in the questions.. Page 187 2012. 2012. Total:………. Absentees: ……………….... COUNTRIES Period 95 CITIES, BUILDINGS AND PEOPLE ( B3-B4 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(188)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to make comparison by reading facts about famous places in the world. Vocabulary: hight, long, thick, structure, petronas twin towers, great wall, sears tower Structure: Which is taller Sears tower or Petronas Twin Towers? How long/thick is great wall? - It is 452 meter high. - It is over 6.000 kilometers long. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette for activity 3, 4, picture for activity 3, 4 Students:paper to do exercise in groups III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ CONTENT ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) Speaking -To check the old lesson a-Which is the biggest city in Vietnam? Ask students some questions ……………………………………………… b-Is HCM city smaller than Ha Noi? ……………………………………………… c-What is the biggest city in Britain? ……………………………………………… d-What is the biggest city in Japan? ……………………………………………… 2-PRE-READING ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words and how to ask and answer about the height, thickness…… Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New words high ( adj )-cao high ( adj ) twin ( n )-cặp đôi twin ( n ) tower ( n )-tháp tower ( n ) thick ( adj )-dày thick ( adj ) structure ( n )-công trình kiến trúc structure ( n ) long ( adj )-dài long ( adj ) 422 meters ( m ) high---four hundred and 422 meters ( m ) high---four hundred and forty two meters ( m ) high forty two meters ( m ) high 6,000 kilometers ( km ) long--- six thousand 6,000 kilometers ( km ) long--- six thousand kilometers ( km ) long kilometers ( km ) long 12 meters thich--- twelve meters ( m ) thick 12 meters thich--- twelve meters ( m ) thick Model sentence 2-Grammar structure ( revision ) Comparative of short adjectives Comparative of short adjectives S1 + am + short adj + ER + than + S2 …. S1 + am + short adj + ER + than + S2 …. is / are is / are Superlative Sears Tower in Chicago is shorter than S + am / is / are + the + short adj + EST... Petronas Twin Tower in Kuala Lumpur. Superlative S + am / is / are + the + short adj + EST... It is the tallest building in the world. Page 188 How long is the Great Wall? It is 6,000 km long. How high tall are you? I am 1,5 m tall..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(189)</span> 3-WHILE-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise reading Ask students to listen to the tape while reading ( B 3-page 160, B4-page 161) Ask students to read the text again and then answer the questions. 4-POST-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To check students’ understand Ask students to write five sentences ( using comparative and superlative of short adjectives. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 3 on page 130 workbook.. 1-Listen and repeat ( B3, B4 page 160-161) Students listen and repeat. ……………………………………………… 2-Question and answer a-Which is taller: Sears Tower or Petronas Twin Towers? Petronas Twin Towers is taller than Sears Tower. b-How long is the Great Wall ? It is over 6,000 kilometers long. c-How high is the Great Wall ? It is between 4 and 12 meters high. d-How thick is the Great Wall ? It is over 9 meters thick. Writing -I am the tallest student in the class. -This table is longer than that one. -They are shorter than I am. ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… Exercise 3: Look at the pictures and the information. Then write 5 sentences comparing these structure. Use bigger, smaller, smallest, taller, tallest.. Page 189 th. Planning date:April 15 Teaching date:April 17th UNIT 15 Week 34. 2012. 2012. Total:……….... Absentees: ……………….... COUNTRIES Period 96 NATURAL FEATURES ( C1-C2 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(190)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “ lots of…” as a quantifier with geography vocabulary to describe Viet Nam. Vocabulary: a forest, rain, a desert, a lot of, lots of…………. Structure: We have lots of mountains / money. a lot of rain. II-PREPARATION Teacher: pictures and cassette for activity 1 Students: exercise on page 164 on a paper III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ CONTENT ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson. Speaking Ask students to come to the board and make She is taller than me. sentences ( using comparative and superlative These tables are longer than those ones. adjectives ) This is the biggest house on this street. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students the meaning and how to pronounce new words and the use of lots of and a lot of. Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New word a forest ( n )-rừng a forest ( n ) a desert ( n )-sa mạc a desert ( n ) rain ( n, v )-mưa rain ( n, v ) great ( adj )-to lớn, vĩ đại great ( adj ) lots of = a lot of = many lots of = a lot of = many Model sentences 2-Grammar structure We have lots of mountains / rivers. We have lots of mountains / rivers. rain rain we use lots of….. a lot of….. for both She has a lot of sugar. countable noun and uncountable noun. of books. we use lots of ….. a lot of ….. for both countable noun and uncountable noun. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students read the text and answer questions following the text. Present the text 1-Listen and repeat ( C1-page 162-163 ) Ask students to listen to the tape while Students listen and repeat the text. reading the text. ……………………………………………… Ask them to read the text again and then 2-Questions and answer answer the question below. What are the six natural features Lan tells us about? 1-Mountains 2-rivers 3-lakes 4-rain 5-forest 6-beaches. Picture drill ( C2 page 164 ) S1: Does Viet nam have lots of mountains? S2: Yes it does. Page 190 S3: Does it have a lot of deserts? S4: No, it doesn’t. ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………….

<span class='text_page_counter'>(191)</span> Ask students to complete the passage ( C1 page 164 ).. 3-Complete the passage Viet nam has lots of beautiful mountains. It has great rivers and lots of lakes. There is a lot of rain so the country is very green. There are big forests and there are many beautiful beaches. There aren’t any deserts.. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) To check students’understand. Matching Ask students to do the matching. 1-Matching. Write it up Ask students to write a paragraph about Viet Nam ( use the information in the table in matching ). 2-Writing My country is very beautiful and interesting. In Lai Chau there are lots of forests………... ……………………………………………… ………………………………………………. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1, 2 on page 130 workbook.. Lai Chau Can Tho Ha Noi Pleiku Da Nang Hue Quang Ninh. Forest Beaches Mountains Rice fields Rivers Lakes Rain. Exercise 1: Answer the questions about your hometown with Yes, it does or No, it doesn’t. Exercise 2: Liz is asking Hoa questions about Hue. Fill in Liz’s question.. Page 191 Planning date:April 16th 2012. Teaching date:April 18th 2012. Total: ………..... Absentees:……………………… UNIT 15 COUNTRIES Week 34 Period 97 NATURAL FEATURES ( C3 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(192)</span> I-OBJECTIVE Reading a text about the world’s great rivers and mountains to skim for details and get further practice in using comparatives and superlatives. Vocabulary: flow to, the sea, the Red river, the Mekong river……. Structure: Which is the longest river in Viet Nam? The Mekong river is the longest river in Viet Nam. II-PREPARATION Teacher: cessette for reading Students: paper to answer the questions in groups III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ CONTENT ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson. Speaking Ask students to come to the board and make My book is newer than your book. sentences ( using comparative and His book is the newest book in the class. superlative adjectives ) Her pen is nicer than my pen. Her pen is the nicest of three pens. 2-PRE-READING ( 15 minutes ) To give students how to read, the meaning of new words and give them the main ideas of the text. Pre-teach vocabulary 1-New word to flow ( v )-chẩy to flow ( v ) the sea ( n )-biển the sea ( n ) Tibet ( n )-Tây tạng Tibet ( n ) North Africa ( n )-Bắc phi North Africa ( n ) True-false prediction 2-True-false prediction Ask students to read these statements and the a-There are two great rivers in Viet Nam. decide which statements are true and which b-The Red River is longer than the Mekong are false. River. c-The Red River and the Mekong River both start in China. d-The longest river in the world is not in Viet Nam. e-Phanxipang is the highest mountain in the world. 3-WHILE-READING ( 10 minutes ) To help students practise reading the text and answering the questions follow. Present the text 1-Listen and read Ask students to listen to the tape while Students listen and repeat ( C3-page 165 ) reading the text. ……………………………………………… Ask them to read the text again and check 2-Checking their prediction their prediction. 1-T 2-F 3-F 4-T 5-F ........................................................................ Comprehension questions 3-Questions and answer Page 192 a-Which is the longest river in Viet Nam? The Red River is the longest river in Viet Nam. b-Where does the Mekong River start?.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(193)</span> It starts in Tibet. c-Which is the longest river in the world? The Nile River is the longest river in the world. d-Which sea does the Nile River flow to? It flows to the Mediterranean Sea. e-Which is the highest mountain in the world? Mountain Everest is the highest mountain in the world. f-Which is the highest mountain in Viet Nam? Phanxipang is the highest mountain in Viet Nam. 4-POST-READING ( 10 minutes ) To check students’ understand. Ask students to summarize the content of the Summarize the content of the text. text. Viet Nam has two long rivers the red and the Mekon river. The Mekong is longer than the Red river. They flow to the Bien Dong ……. ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 3 on page 131 Exercise 3: Check things you have and cross workbook. things you don’t have in your city / town / village. Then write true sentences about it. Use has, there is and there are.. Page 193 Planning date:April 21st 2012. Teaching date:April 23rd 2012. Total:………. Absentees: …………………… UNIT 16 MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT Week 35 Period 98 ANIMALS AND PLANTS ( A1-A2 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(194)</span> I-OBJECTIVE Reading a text about farming and getting further practice in a lot, a little and a few Vocabulary: work, plow, grow, produce, animal …….. Structure: They produce a little fruit. He has a few cows. II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette and picture for activity 2-3 Students: paper to do exercise in groups III-PROCEDURE. on his farm and 5 things he produces. 3-WHILE-READING ( 10 minutes ). 1………………….. 2………………….. ……………………. Page 194 1………………….. 2………………….. …………………….

<span class='text_page_counter'>(195)</span> -To help students practise reading and answer the questions. Ask students to listen to the tape while reading the text. Ask them to read the text again and check their predictions.. Comprehension questions a-How much rice does Mr.Hai produce? b-Does he produce any vegetables? c-How much fruit does he produce? d-How much milk do his cows produce? e-How many eggs do his chickens produce? 4-POST-READING ( 10 minutes ) To check students’understand. Grids. Ask students.. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1 on page 132. 1-Listen and repeat Students read the text.. 2-Check their prediction Mr.Hai has…….. Mr.Hai produces. 1.paddy fields 1.rice 2.a small vegetable 2.vegetable 3.fruit juice 3.fruit 4-buffalo 4.milk 5.cows 5.eggs 6.chickens 3-Questions and answer He produces a lot of rice. Yes, he does. He produces a little fruit. They produce a little milk. They produce a lot of eggs. Mr.Hai has, a some a a grow lot few little produces paddy fields v rice v vegetable v fruit tree v fruit v animal v buffalo v v cows v milk v v chickens eggs v Questions and answer a-How many paddy fields does Mr.Hai have? Some b-How much rice does he produce? A lot ....................................................................... Exercise 1: Write under the pictures. Use some / a lot of / a little or a few.. Page 195 nd. Planning date:April 22 Teaching date:April 24th UNIT 16 Week 35 I-OBJECTIVE. 2012. 2012. Total:……….... Absentees:………………..... MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT Period 99 ANIMALS AND PLANTS ( A3, A6 ).

<span class='text_page_counter'>(196)</span> By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write the letter of the picture under the right heading by listening. Vocabulary: words for food, quantifiers ( revision ) Structure: how much rice is there? How many eggs are there? There is a little rice. There are a few eggs. II-PREPARATION Teacher: pictures and cassette for activity 4 Students: paper to do exefcise in groups III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ CONTENT ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson Matching Khoai tây Onion Cà chua Rice Hành Vegetable Rau Flower Gạo Potato Hoa Tomato 2-PRE-LISTENING ( 15 minutes ) -To help students review countable and uncountable quantifiers, help them predict quantifier used for each picture. Ask students to give how to use quantifiers. 1-Grammar structure There are + a few / some + countable plural a lot of noun. There is + a little / some + uncountable a lot of noun Example: There are a few / some / a lot of potatoes. There is a little / some / a lot of rice. Ask them to predict quantifiers which can be 2-Prediction used for each picture. Picture a: some / a few / a lof potatoes. b: a few / some tomatoes. c: some / a few onions. d: some / a few vegetables. e: a little / some rice f: some flowers. 3-WHILE-LISTENING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise listening Practise listening Ask studenst to listen to the tape and check Picture You predict You hear their prediction. a a lot of b some c a lot of Page 196 d a few e a little f some 4-POST-LISTENING ( 10 minutes ) -To check students’ understand.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(197)</span> Ask students. Question and answer a-How many potatoes are there in the picture a? ........................................................................ b-What about picture b? ........................................................................ c-How many onions are there in the picture c? ........................................................................ d-What about picture d? ........................................................................ e-How much rice is there in the picture e? ........................................................................ f-How many flowers are there in the picture f? ......................................................................... 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 3 on page 133 workbook.. Exercise 3: Look at exercise 2 again. Write the questions and full answer for the sentences in B.. Page 197 rd. Planning date:April 23 2012. Teaching date:April 25th 2012. Total: ………... Absentees: ……………………... UNIT 16 MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT Week 35 Period 100 POLLUTION ( B1 ) I-OBJECTIVE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(198)</span> Reading a text about pollution for vocabulaty and to understand ideas. Vocabulary: the environment, the ocean, the air, to pollute Structure: what are we doing to our environment? we are destroying the forests II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette and picture for activity 1 Students: review the present continuous tense. III-PROCEDURE. TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson. Ask students to look at the pictures on page 166. Ask them. 2-PRE-READING ( 15 minutes ) -To give students how to read and the meaning of new words. Pre-teach vocabulary the environment ( n )-môi trường the ocean ( n )-đại dương the air ( n )-không khí, môi trường to pollute ( v )-làm ô nhiễm to waste ( v )-làm lãng phí power ( n )-năng lượng oil ( n )-dầu coal ( n )-than Grammar structure Ask students to give the form and how to use the present progressive tense. Pre-question predict. 3-WHILE-READING ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise reading Ask students to listen to the tape while reading the text. Ask them to read the text again and then check their prediction and answer the questions. Comprehension questions. CONTENT Speaking a-How much rice is there in picture 1? …………………………………………........ b-How much rice is there in picture 2? ……………………………………………… c-How many eggs are there in picture 5? …………………………………………......... 1-New word the environment ( n ) the ocean ( n ) the air ( n ) to pollute ( v ) to waste ( v ) power ( n ) oil ( n ) coal ( n ) 2-Grammar structure ( revision ) -The form : -How to use: 3-Prediction What are we destroying? ( 1… 2…. 3….) What are we wasting? ( 1… 2…. 3….) What are we polluting? ( 1… 2…. 3….) 1-Listen and repeat Students read the text in chorus. ……………………………………………… 2-Checking prediction What are we destroying? 1.forests , 2.wild animals, 3.plants Page 198 What are we wasting? 1.water, 2. power ( coal, oil, gas ) What are we polluting? 1.the air, 2.the land, 3.the rivers, 4. the oceans 3-Questions and answer.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(199)</span> a-Why are wild animals and plants in danger? Because we are destroying the forest. b-What is polluting the air? People are polluting the air: they are burning too much coal, oil and gas. c-Where does the pollution come from? The pollution comes from gases and trash. d-What is polluting the land, the rivers and the oceans? Trash is polluting the land, rivers and oceans. 4-POST-READING ( 10 minutes ) To check students’understand. Write it up Ask students to make a list of “ Don’t”. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 1 on page 134 work book.. Writing Ex: Don’t destroy our environment. the forests ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… Exercise 1: What are we doing to the environment? Answer the questions.. Page 199 Planning date: May 2012. Teaching date:May 2012. Total: ………..... Absentees:………………………… UNIT 16 MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT Week 36 Period 101 POLLUTION ( B2-B3 ) I-OBJECTIVE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(200)</span> By the end of the lesson, students will be able give advice about protecting the environment Vocabulary to throw, to pick, to damage Structure we should collect paper. We shouldn’t throw trash on the street. II-PREPARATION Teacher: cassette and pictures for activity 2 Students: pictures for activity 2. III-PROCEDURE. Page 200 Note: shouldn’t = should not , should and shouldn’t for all persons. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise speaking Matching. Matching.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(201)</span> Ask students to do the matching. should shouldn’t. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise by themselves Ask students to meke sentences with should and shouldn’t.. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 2 on page 134 work book.. damage collect throw save pick. trash trees paper flowers bottles and cans. We should collect paper. We shouldn’t throw trash on the streets. ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… Practise speaking Ex: We should clean our classroom and our school every day. We shouldn’t damage the trees around our school. …………………………………………........ ……………………………………………… Exercise 2: Write what we should or shouldn’t do with these things.. Page 201 Planning date:May 2012. Teaching date:May 2012. Total: ……….... Absentees:………………………… UNIT 16 MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT Week 36 Period 102 POLLUTION ( B4-B5 ) I-OBJECTIVE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(202)</span> By the end of the lesson, students will be able to give advice about the environment by using should and shouldn’t. Vocabulary: a trash can, to leave, to put Structure: we should grow more trees. II-PREPARATION Teacher:cassette for activity 4, picture for activity 5 Students:paper to do exercise in groups. III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To lead students into new lesson Ask students.. 2-PRESENTATION ( 15 minutes ) -To give students how to read and the meaning of new words, review how to use should / shouldn’t for students. Pre-teach vocabulary a trash can ( n )-bô rác to leave ( n )-bỏ lại, bỏ quên to put ( v )-đặt, để a bag ( n )-cái túi Model sentences ( B4 page 171 ). Presentation texts ( B4-page 171 ). 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise speaking. Picture drill ( B5 page 172 ). CONTENT Questions and answer What should we do to keep our environment better? We should …………………………………. We shouldn’t ……………………………….. 1-New word a trash can ( n ) to leave ( n ) to put ( v ) a bag ( n ) 2-Grammar structure S + should / shouldn’t + do smt. Should / shouldn’t for all persons How to use: we use should / shouldn’t to advise someone to do or not to do smt. You should study harder. You shouldn’t stay up late. 3-Listen and repeat Students read B4 in chorus. ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… Speaking S1: We shouldn’t leave trash. S2: That is right. S3: We shouldn’t waste water. S4: That is right, we should save it. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………......... 4-PRODUCTION Page 202 To help students practise speaking What should you do to keep our school , your house cleaner?. Practise speaking and writing We should clean our classroom every day We should put trash into waste basket We shouldn’t throw trash on the school ground. We shoud collect used paper, cans, bottles ....

<span class='text_page_counter'>(203)</span> ........................................................................ ........................................................................ 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home do exercise 4 on page 135 workbook.. Exercise 4: Write the names of things people collect and recycle under the pictures.. Page 203 Planning date:May 2012. Teaching date:May 2012. Total: ………..... Absentees: ………………………… Week 36 Period 103 GRAMMAR PRACTICE I-OBJECTIVE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(204)</span> By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use the simple present, present progressive tense, comparative of adjective to talk daily routines, happening action and compare. Vocabulary: Structure: What does she do? She is a teacher. Where is she staying now? She is staying in Ha Noi. He is taller than his father. II-PREPARATION Teacher: form of the simple present, present progressive tense. Students: form of comparatives and superlatives.. III-PROCEDURE TEACHER AND STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES 1-WARM-UP ( 5 minutes ) -To check the old lesson. Ask students to make sentences ( using the simple present, present progressive tense ).. 2-PRESENTATION ( 10 minutes ) -To help students review simple present, present progressive tense and comparatives and superlatives. Ask students to give the form of the simple present, present progressive tense and comparatives and superlatives.. 3-PRACTICE ( 15 minutes ) -To help students practice all of what they have just reviewed Grammar practice 1: Present simple tense. Grammar practice 2: Present simple or present progressive tense.. CONTENT Speaking I never go to school late. She always washes her clothes. They are playing soccer in the school yard now. My mother is cooking in the kitchen at the moment. Grammar structures ( revision ) The simple present tense. -S + V-s / es………………………………… -S+ don’t / doesn’t + V……………………... -Do / Does + S + V…………………………. The present continuous tense. S + am / is / are + V-ing……………………. S + am not / isn’t / aren’t + V-ing………….. Is /are + S + V-ing ………………………..? Comparative and superlative. S1+ be + short adjective - ER + than + S2 S + be + the + short adjective –EST Indefinite quantifiers A few / a lot of / lots of + countable noun. A little / a lot of / lots of + uncountable noun. a-Where are you from? I am from Canada. Do you speak Vietnamese? No, I don’t. I speak English and French. b-Tom is from Canada. He speaks French and English. c-Lee is from China. He speaks Chinese. ........................................................................ Page 204 a-What is her name? Her name is Susan. b-Where does she live ? She lives in London..

<span class='text_page_counter'>(205)</span> c-Where is she staying now? She is staying in Ha Noi now. What does she do ? She is a teacher. ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… Grammar practice 3: Adjectives comparatives and superlatives.. 4-PRODUCTION ( 10 minutes ) -To check students’ understand Grammar practice 3: Complete the passage.. Grammar practice 4: Indefinite quantifiers: a few, a little, a lot and lots. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home review the present continuous tense.. adjective comparative superlative short adj + er the –short adj + est. long short tall small big hight. longer shorter. the longest the shortest. a-The Mekong river is long. The Amazon river is longer than the Mekong. The Nile is the longest river in the world. b-The Great Wall of China is long. It is the longest structure in the world. …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ …………………………………………........ The streets of Ha Noi are very busy. There is a lot of traffic. Most people only havea little money to spend on transportation. As a result, there are only a few private cars on the roads. ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… ………………………………………………. Page 205 Planning date:May 2012. Teaching date:May 2012. Total: ………..... Absentees:……………………… Week 36 Period 104 REVIEW THE PRESENT CONTINUOUS TENSE AND THE SIMPLE PRESENT TENSE.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(206)</span> I-OBJECTIVE By the endof the lesson, students will be able to distinguish how to use the simple present and the present continuous tense. Vocabulary: Structure: My father drinks tea everyday but to day he is not drinking tea. He is drinking coffee. II-PREPARATION Teacher: form of the simple present and present continuous tense Students: review the two tenses.. III-PROCEDURE. Page 206 They play---she plays. How to use: The simple present used to express habitual action. This tense is often used with adverbs or.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(207)</span> adverb phrases such as always….every day… on Monday….. twice a year. 3-PRACTICE ( 10 minutes ) -To help students practise. Put the verbs in the brackets below into the simple present tense. Everyday Lan gets up at 6 am. She ( brush ) …… her teeth, washes her face and (have) …… breakfast at 6.30. After breakfast, she ( get ) …… dressed and goes to shool at 6.45. Her classes ( start ) …… at 7 am and ( finish ) …… at 11 am. After school, she ( go ) …. home and has lunch at 11.30. In the afternoon Lan ( do ) …… her homework from 2 pm to 5 pm. After that she ( help ) …… her Mom cook dinner. In the evening she ( watch ) ……. TV from 7 pm to 8 pm. She ( read ) ……. books at 9 pm and goes to bed at 10pm. Complete the sentences below. 1-It ( be ) ten o’clock. We ( learn ) our lesson. 2-What you ( do ) now ? I ( unload ) the vegetables. 3-Ba ( work ) in the garden at the moment? 4-Where your children ( be )? They are upstairs. They ( play ) video games. 4-PRODUCTION To help students further practice.. Everyday Lan gets up at 6 am. She ( brush ) brushes her teeth, washes her face and ( have ) has breakfast at 6.30. After breakfast, she ( get ) gets dressed and goes to shool at 6.45. Her classes ( start ) starts at 7 am and ( finish ) finishes at 11 am. After school, she ( go ) goes home and has lunch at 11.30. In the afternoon Lan ( do ) does her homework from 2 pm to 5 pm. After that she ( help ) helps her Mom cook dinner. In the evening she ( watch ) watches TV from 7 pm to 8 pm. She ( read ) reads books at 9 pm and goes to bed at 10pm. 1-It is ten o’clock. We are learning our lesson. 2-What are you doing now ? I am unloading the vegetables. 3- Is Ba working in the garden at the moment? 4-Where are your children ? They are upstairs. They are playing video games.. Put the verbs in brackets below into the simple present, the present continuous or 1-What ….. your sister ( do )………….? going to do She ( be )……a nurse, but she ( not work ) 1-What does your sister do ? ……………at the moment. She is a nurse, but she is not working at the 2-There ( be )…any vegetables in the kitchen? moment. 3-My parents ( visit )…………Ha Long Bay 2-Are there any vegetables in the kitchen? this summer vacation. 3-My parents are going to visit Ha Long Bay 4-Nam usually ( study )………..in the school this summer vacation. library in the afternoon but he sometimes 4-Nam usually studies in the school library ( play )…………..soccer with his friends. in the afternoon but he sometimes plays 5-Mr.Minh ( not live )………….in town. His soccer with his friends. house is in the country. 5-Mr.Minh doesn’t live in town. His house is 6-My father ( watch )………….Tv in the in the country. living room. He often ( watch )…………. 6-My father is watching TV in the living TV in the evening. room. He often watches TV in the evening. 5-HOME-WORK ( 5 minutes ) At home review all of what you studied in the second term for the test next lesson. ........................................................................ ……………………………………………… Page 207.

<span class='text_page_counter'>(208)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(209)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(210)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(211)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(212)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(213)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(214)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(215)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(216)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(217)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(218)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(219)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(220)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(221)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(222)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(223)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(224)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(225)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(226)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(227)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(228)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(229)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(230)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(231)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(232)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(233)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(234)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(235)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(236)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(237)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(238)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(239)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(240)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(241)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(242)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(243)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(244)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(245)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(246)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(247)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(248)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(249)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(250)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(251)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(252)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(253)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(254)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(255)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(256)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(257)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(258)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(259)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(260)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(261)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(262)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(263)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(264)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(265)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(266)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(267)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(268)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(269)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(270)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(271)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(272)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(273)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(274)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(275)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(276)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(277)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(278)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(279)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(280)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(281)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(282)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(283)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(284)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(285)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(286)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(287)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(288)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(289)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(290)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(291)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(292)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(293)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(294)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(295)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(296)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(297)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(298)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(299)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(300)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(301)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(302)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(303)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(304)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(305)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(306)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(307)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(308)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(309)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(310)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(311)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(312)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(313)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(314)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(315)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(316)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(317)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(318)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(319)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(320)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(321)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(322)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(323)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(324)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(325)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(326)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(327)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(328)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(329)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(330)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(331)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(332)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(333)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(334)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(335)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(336)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(337)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(338)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(339)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(340)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(341)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(342)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(343)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(344)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(345)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(346)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(347)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(348)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(349)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(350)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(351)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(352)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(353)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(354)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(355)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(356)</span>

<span class='text_page_counter'>(357)</span>

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về

Tải bản đầy đủ ngay
×